Skip to main content

Full text of "An introduction to Mahayana Buddhism, with especial reference to Chinese and Japanese phases"

See other formats


\vi\W>?v;>\ 


lR^\\\\Sxx\\^.\w-^.:^- 


■1      -^V^S      ;• 


\", 


■    .    V  ,1*  «    »■ 


■^^^  ;-t^^■•-•^^'*^>^;- 


".A 


■^      *»     «\N 


J*  *  ^  * 


ls^\\\ccc^\\^^\\\^^\\\\\\\\\\v^\>x^^^ 


i^ibmx^af 


lllrllrslnt 


•^.- 


Citllri|f. 


(> 


an  introduction  to 
mahAyana  buddhism 


With    especial    Reference    to 

Chinese  and  Japanese 

Phases 

BY 

WILLIAM  MONTGOMERY  McGOVERN,  Ph.  D. 

Lecturer  on  Japanese  and  Chinese  at  the 
School  of  Oriental  Studies  {University  of  London) ; 
Priest  of  the  Nishi  Honganji,  Kyoto,  Japan 
Author  of  Modern  Japan,  Colloquial  Japanese, 
Elements     of     Japanese      Writing,      etc.,     etc. 


LONDON : 
KEGAN  PAUL,  TRENCH,  TRUBNER  &  CO.,  LTD. 
NEW  YORK:  E.  P.  DUTTON  &  CO. 
1922 


6^ 

/  ^2:2 


DEDICATION 

TO 
MRS.    C.    A.    F.    RHYS-DAVIDS,  M.A.,    D.LITT. 

Dear  Mrs.  Rhys-Davids, 

In  dedicating  to  you  this  exposition  of  the 
bare  essentials  of  the  Mahayana  philosophy,  I 
feel  that  I  must  explain  something  of  its  scope 
and  aim. 

In  its  original  form  the  present  work  was  part 
of  a  thesis  which,  when  presented  to  the  Japanese 
cathedral,  the  Nishi  Honganji,  secured  me  my 
Buddhist  degree,  and  an  honorary  ordination  as 
a  Buddhist  priest.  In  consequence  I  hope  that 
it  may  be  considered  to  represent,  as  far  as  it 
goes,  what  the  Japanese  Buddhists  believe  to 
be  true,  and  what  they  consider  accurate. 

In  presenting  the  book  in  a  new  dress  before 
the  Western  public,  a  good  deal  of  revision  has 
taken  place,  but  this  has  been  chiefly  a  matter 
of  omission  and  simplification.  All  technical 
details  have  been  deleted,  and  any  unusual 
idea  or  term  has  had  placed  after  it  a  few  words  of 
elementary  elucidation. 


^^ 


iv  DEDICATION 

I  have  called  it  an  "  introduction  "  for  three 
reasons.  First,  because  it  is  intended  for  a  guide 
to  the  general  reader  of  average  education,  who 
does  not  care  to  go  into  details  ;  second,  because 
it  is  intended  also  to  point  out  the  chief  sign- 
posts to  those  who  desire  to  take  up  the  subject 
somewhat  more  seriously ;  and  third,  because 
it  serves  as  a  preface  to  my  longer,  more  serious, 
and  more  ambitious  book  on  Buddhism,  which  is 
now  in  preparation. 

Finally,  may  I  add  that  though  working  at 
Buddhism  through  Chinese  rather  than  Pali 
sources,  and  from  the  Mahayana  rather  than  the 
HJnayana  point  of  view,  with  the  consequence 
that  I  am  afraid  that  you  will  not  always  agree 
with  my  presentation,  yet  I  wish  to  thank  you 
most  heartily  for  your  encouragement,  discussion, 
and  occasional  advice. 

Yours  sincerely, 

WILLIAM  MONTGOMERY  MCGOVERN. 
Christ  Church,  Oxford. 


CONTENTS 


CHAP.  PAGE 

INTEODUCTION  ;    the  doctrinal 

EVOLUTION    OF   BUDDHISM  .  .  I 

I.       EPISTEMOLOGY    AND    LOGIC      .  .  .  .        32 

II.       THE    NATURE    OF    THE    ABSOLUTE    AND 

ITS   RELATION    TO    THE    UNIVERSE         48 

III.       THE     TRIKA"yA — THE     BUDDHIST 

DOCTRINE    OF    THE    TRINITY  .  .        J^ 

IV.      THE      NATURE      AND       POWERS       OF 

BUDDHAHOOD  .  .  .  .  •  •        99 

V.       PSYCHOLOGY — ELEMENTS      OF      EXIST- 
ENCE   132 

VI.       THE    WHEEL    OF    LIFE    AND    THE    ROAD 

TO    NIRVANA  1 53 

CONCLUSION:    A    short    history 

OF  BUDDHISM  AND  THE   PRINCIPAL 
BUDDHIST    SECTS     ..  ..  ..     180 

APPENDIX :    the   sacred   litera- 

TL^RE    OF    THE    BUDDHISTS  ..     2!  5 


INTEODUCTION 

THE    DOCTRINAL    EVOLUTION    OF 
BUDDHISM 

Buddhism  is  divided  into  two  great  schools, 
Mahayana  and  Hinayana.  Both  systems  origi- 
nated in  India,  but  since  the  former  predomi- 
nates in  China,  Japan,  Nepal,  and,  in  a  modified 
form,  in  Tibet  and  Mongolia,  while  the  latter  is 
confined  almost  exclusively  to  Ceylon,  Burma, 
and  Siam,  they  are  often,  and  rather  incorrectly, 
known  as  Northern  and  Southern  Buddhism. 

Mahayana  is  again  divided  into  unreformed 
and  reformed  branches,  the  unreformed  branch 
being  found  all  over  Eastern  Asia,  while  there- 
formed  branch  has  its  centre  in  Japan.  Eoughly, 
we  may  compare  these  divisions  of  Buddhism 
to  those  of  the  principal  Occidental  faiths.  Hina- 
yana, or  the  earlier  and  more  primitive  form  of 
Buddhism,  corresponds  to  Judaism  ;  Unreformed 
Mahayana  to  Catholicism,  and  Reformed  Maha- 
yana to  Protestantism. 

Of  recent  years,  owing  to  the  labours  of  such 
scholars  as  Spence  Hardy,  Gogerly,  Prof,  and  Mrs. 


2     INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

Khys-Davids,  etc.,  Hinayana  has  become  more 
or  less  known  to  the  Western  world,  but  Maha- 
yana  still  awaits  adequate  treatment.  Different 
scholars  in  dealing  with  Mahayana  have  spoken 
of  it  as  a  ritualistic  and  animistic  degeneration 
of  Hinayana  ;  as  sophistic  nihilism,  as  mystic 
pantheism.  They  have  claimed  it  to  be  now 
monotheistic,  now  polytheistic,  now  atheistic  ;  or 
finally,  they  have  contented  themselves  with 
stating  that  it  is  a  vast  mass  of  contradictory 
ideas,  unassimilated  and  undefined. 

It  is  obvious  that  all  of  these  descriptions  can 
not  be  true,  while  the  historical  importance  of 
the  Mahayana  philosophy  renders  it  imperative 
to  attempt  some  more  concise  interpretation  of 
its  essential  elements,  for  as  Christians  far  out- 
number Jews,  so  do  Mahayanists  far  outnumber 
Hinayanists  ;  as  Christianity  has  had  far  more 
important  cultural  connections  than  Judaism,  so 
has  Mahayana,  at  the  expense  of  Hinayana, 
ineffaceably  linked  itself  with  the  civilizations  of 
vast  parts  of  Asia ;  and  as  the  early  fathers  of 
the  Christian  Church  and  the  schoolmen  of  the 
Middle  Ages  built  up  a  religious  and  philosophic 
system  far  more  important  than  the  ideas  ex- 
pressed in  Eabbinic  schools,  so  is  Mahayana  the 
outcome  of  centuries  of  speculative  development, 


INTRODUCTION  3 

enriched  by  materials  from  all  sources,  and  ex- 
pounded by  the  great  bulk  of  the  ancient  meta- 
physicians of  India  and  China,  while  Hina- 
yana  has  remained  far  more  narrow  and  confined 
in  its  philosophic  evolution. 

Indian  TJiought  at  the  Time  of  the  Buddha. 

Any  adequate  understanding  of  Mahayana 
must  be  based  upon  a  comprehension  of  the 
stages  of  its  development,  of  the  processes  by 
which  it  differentiated  itself  from  the  more  primi- 
tive Hinayana,  of  the  relation  of  the  latter  to 
pristine  Buddhism,  and  of  the  place  of  this 
pristine  Buddhism  in  Indian  thought. 

The  period  in  which  Gautama  or  ^akyamuni, 
the  historical  founder  of  Buddhism,  lived  (some 
five  and  a  half  centuries  B.C.)  was  in  many  ways 
an  interesting  one.  The  earlier  child-like  beliefs 
of  the  Vedas  had  dwindled,  and  the  implicit 
acceptance  of  the  primeval_deities  had  given  way, 
at  least  among  the  educated  classes,  to  a  keen 
discussion,  from  a  mystico-rationalist  point  of 
view  of  the  essential  problems  of  existence.  It 
was  the  age  of  the  formulation  of  metaphysical 
systems.  Bands  of  mendicant  teachers  went 
forth  proclaiming  new  syntheses  of  knowledge, 
new  outlooks  on  life. 


4      INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

These  Indian  philosophers,  like  their  contem- 
porary Occidental  brethren,  were  primarily  con- 
cerned with  problems  relating  to  (I)  the  nature 
of  ultimate  reality,  and  (II)  methods  of  ascertain- 
ing truth. 

I. — Just  as  the  early  Greek  philosophers  were 
divided  into  (a)  a  School  of  Naive  Eealists,  (6)  a 
School  of  Being,  and  (c)  a  School  of  Becoming,  so 
did  the  Indians  divide  themselves  into  (1)  those 
who  followed  the  Vedic  hymns  and  accepted  the 
universe  at  its  face  value,  (2)  those  who  taught 
that  the  ultimate  nature  of  things  is  quiescent  and 
changeless,  that  beyond  the  realm  of  fluctuating 
phenomena  is  the  realm  of  the  absolute,  in  which 
there  is  no  space  and  time,  but  only  an  eternal 
present,  and  (3)  those  who  taught  that  change, 
flux,  becoming,  integration  and  disintegration, 
are  inherent  in  the  nature  of  things  ;  that  no 
thing  ever  remains  the  same  for  two  consecutive 
moments  ;  that  even  the  Absolute  is  ever  evolv- 
ing and  becoming. 

II. — Consequent  upon  these  differences  of  out- 
look upon  the  nature  of  reality,  there  arose  widely 
divergent  theories  concerning  the  basis  of  truth  : 

(1)  Truth  through  sense  impression.  In  early 
days  man  instinctively  believed  in  the  validity 


INTRODUCTION  5 

of  his  sense  impressions.  All  things  were  sup- 
posed to  be  exactly  as  we  see  them,  and  absolute 
truth  was  to  be  gained  by  experience. 

(2)  Truth  through  reason.  Gradually,  however, 
as  the  limitations  of  the  senses  come  to  be  felt, 
it  is  recognized  that  the  ceaseless  change  of  the 
phenomenal  world  prevents  our  obtaining  an 
insight  into  its  nature  by  means  of  the  senses. 
But  the  school  of  Being  represented  by  the 
Upanishads  taught  that  man's  soul  is  not  of  the 
phenomenal  but  of  the  noumenal  world,  that  he 
might,  through  the  exercise  of  his  mental 
powers,  gain  a  direct  insight  into  the 
ultimate  nature  of  reality.  This  Vedanta  doc- 
trine corresponds  very  closely  to  certain  phases 
of  Plato's  theory  of  knowledge. 

(3)  Truth  through  psychological  analysis. — 
While  the  Vedantins  and  Plato  were  content  to 
accept  the  validity  of  reason,  supported,  no  doubt, 
by  the  seeming  absolutivity  of  mathematics,  the 
Indian  school  of  Becoming  came  to  regard  the 
mind,  not  as  an  independent,  unconditioned,  and 
eternal  entity  having  a  direct  insight  into  truth, 
but  as  a  limited,  caused,  confined,  and  con- 
ditioned organism  whose  data  are  of  purely  rela- 
tive value.  Acute  analysis  of  the  functions  of 
consciousness  no   doubt  aided  this  conception, 


6     INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

and  the  conflicting  nature  of  all  reasoning  seemed 
to  support  it.  In  spite  of  age-long  disputes,  no 
two  systems  of  philosophy  agreed,  and  no  single 
rational  doctrine  could  claim  universal  accept- 
ance. 

Consequently,  only  the  immediate  data  of 
consciousness  could  claim  assured  validity.  We 
have  no  means  of  ascertaining  whether  or  not 
these  data  correspond  to  ultimate  reality,  or  are 
logically  consistent,  but  of  the  reality  of  feelings 
qua  feelings,  there  can  be  no  doubt. 

Primitive  Buddhism. 

Primitive  Buddhism,  so  far  as  we  can  judge 
its  doctrines  by  means  of  higher  criticism  of  the 
various  recensions  of  the  Siitra  Pitaka,  was  the 
supreme  example  of  the  Indian  Becoming  philo- 
soi)hy.  Change  was  the  foundation  stone  on 
which  its  metaphysic  rested.  The  body  was 
considered  a  living  complex  organism,  possessing 
no  self -nature.  The  nature  of  the  mind  was  sup- 
posed to  be  analogous.  The  percipient  conscious- 
ness had  no  direct  insight  into  truth  through  a 
stable  and  transcendent  reason,  but  was  a  com- 
pound effected  by  the  chain  of  causality,  and 
conditioned  by  its  environment. 

Consequently  at  the  outset  Buddhism  assumed 
an  agnostic  position  concerning  transcendental 


INTRODUCTION  7 

problems.  "  These  problems  the  Blessed  One 
has  left  unelucidated,  has  set  aside,  has  rejected 
— that  the  world  is  eternal,  that  the  world  is  not 
eternal,  that  the  world  is  finite,  that  the  world 
is  infinite,  etc." 

In  a  word.  Buddhism  insisted  that  we  can  only- 
deal  with  facts  and  data  of  which  we  are  imme- 
diately conscious  ;  with  states  of  consciousness  ; 
with  an  analysis  of  the  emotions  ;  with  the 
universe  as  perceived  as  opposed  to  the  universe 
as  it  is. 

The  doctrines  of  primitive  Buddhism  are  all  in 
accordance  with  this  psychological  basis,  as  may 
be  seen  by  examining  its  theory  of  the  Three 
Marks  and  the  Four  Noble  Truths. 

The  Three  Marks  are  not  doctrines  which  are 
to  be  accepted  on  faith,  or  as  the  result  of  logical 
reasoning,  but  are  considered  the  essential  charac- 
teristics of  life  as  recognized  by  every  day 
perceptual  and  emotional  experience. 

They  are  :  "  (1)  All  is  impermanent.  (2)  All 
is  sorrowful.  (3)  All  is  lacking  a  self."  This 
last  phrase  refers  not  only  to  the  soul,  but  to 
the  universe  as  a  whole.  It  consists  not  of 
simple  or  self-existing  things,  but  of  complex, 
caused,  conditioned  things.  The  fourth  mark, 
Nirvana,  is  no  less  psychological.     By  means  of 


8      INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

contemplation  certain  forms  of  Samadhi,  trance, 
or  ecstasy  were  experienced.  Magnify  the  ex- 
perience, consider  it  permanent,  associate  with  it 
the  abolition  of  sorrow,  sin,  and  ignorance,  and 
the  theory  of  Nirvana  is  formulated,  for  it  must 
be  remembered  that  originally  Nirvana  is  purely 
a  state  of  mind. 

The  so-called  four  Noble  Truths  are  derived 
from  the  same  basic  ideas.  Transformed  from 
an  ancient  Indian  medical  rune,  they  are: — (L) 
Suffering  exists.  (2)  The  cause  of  suffering  is 
desire  (and  ignorance).  (3)  There  is  a  possible 
end  of  suffering — Nirvana.  (4)  This  end  may  be 
achieved  by  following  the  Noble  Eight-fold  Path, 
which  consists  of  (a)  right  knowledge,  (b)  right 
aspiration,  (c)  right  speech,  (d)  right  conduct, 
(e)  right  means  of  livelihood,  (f )  right  endeavour, 
(g)  right  mindfulness,  and  (h)  right  meditation. 

The  first  and  third  "  truths  "  (suffering  and 
Nirvana)  are  the  same  as  the  second  and  fourth 
"  marks."  The  fourth  (the  path  to  Nirvana)  is 
purely  a  point  of  ethics,  and  does  not  at  present 
concern  us.  The  second  (the  cause  of  suffering) 
is  the  most  important,  and  contains  the  seed  of  a 
very  complete  phenomenology,  for  at  a  very 
early  stage  "  suffering  "  became,  in  this  instance, 
synonymous  with  life,  and  this   "  truth  "  was 


JNTR09UCTI9N  9 

supposed  to  explain  the  origin  of  the  experienced 
world — the  experienced  universe,  let  it  be  noted, 
for  early  Buddhism  had  no  interest  in  the  origin 
of  the  external  universe. 

Primitive  Buddhism  though  agnostic  was 
probably  realistically  inclined.  It  believed  that 
there  is  an  external  universe  closely  corresponding 
to  our  sense-data,  but  it  realized  that  in  its 
present  form  the  world  as  we  see  it  is  subjective, 
the  result  of  the  percipient  consciousness 
(vijndna)  acted  upon  by  external  stimuli. 

The  theory  of  the  origin,  awakening,  and 
development  of  the  Vijhana  is  explained  in  the 
obscure  Pratitya  Samutpdda,  or  the  twelve-linked 
chain  of  causation.  This,  though  differently  ex- 
plained by  the  various  schools  of  Buddhism, 
always  consists  of  : — 

(1)  Ignorance. 

(2)  Action. 

(3)  Consciousness. 

(4)  Name  and  Form. 

(5)  The  Senses. 

(6)  Contact. 

(7)  Sensation. 

(8)  Craving. 

(9)  Attachment. 

(10)  Becoming. 

(11)  Birth. 

(12)  Old  age,  disease,  and  death. 


10   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

The  origin  of  the  percipient  consciousness  is 
ignorance  and  desire.  Without  these  the  indi- 
vidual consciousness  would  disintegrate,  and 
though  the  experienced  universe  cannot  exist 
without  object,  it  equally  cannot  exist  without 
subject.  Consequently  when  an  Arhat  (one  who 
has  attained  Mrvana)  dies,  the  experienced  world 
for  that  person  comes  to  an  end. 

It  will  be  seen  from  this  that  there  is  a  close 
connection  between  cause  and  effect.  This  law 
Buddhism  calls  Karma,  and  is  one  of  the  funda- 
mental features  of  the  Buddhist  faith.  Among 
the  innumerable  divisions  of  Karma  we  find  the 
following  : — 

Des/'re 

Ac//o/j    ^     — ^    ffeju/f 

^- 

Another  such  threefold  classification  is  : — 

1.  The  Seed.     {Retu). 

2.  Environment  or  attendant  circumstances. 

(Pratyaya). 

3.  The  result  or  fruit.     (PJiala). 

The  doctrine  of  Andtman  prevents  the  belief 
in  the  persistence  of  the  undying  personality, 
while  the  doctrine  of  Karma,  on  the  other  hand, 
demands  that  there  be  something  that  can  reap 
the  result  of  a  man's  good  or  bad  deeds.   Accord- 


INTRODUCTION  II 

ingly  the  early  Buddhists  taught  that  the  fruit 
of  a  man's  deeds  will  cause  the  birth  of  a  new 
personality  after  the  dissolution  of  the  old.  This 
birth  may  be  in  one  of  the  numerous  heavens  or 
hells,  or  it  may  be  on  the  earth  again. 
Hlnaydna  Buddhism. 

The  philosophy  of  primitive  or  pristine  Budd- 
hism became  crystallized  in  Hinayana  Buddhism, 
the  Orthodox  branch  of  the  faith  which  was 
matured  during  the  period  from  the  death  of  the 
Buddha  down  to  about  the  time  of  the  beginning 
of  the  Christian  era,  after  which  it  had  to  compete 
with  the  newly-developed  Mahayana.  Hinayana 
itself  was  by  no  means  unified,  for  shortly  after 
the  death  of  Gautama  it  broke  up  into  a  number 
of  sects,  with  widely  varying  interpretations  of 
the  earlier  philosophy.  Out  of  the  eighteen  or 
twenty  such  Hinayana  sects,  two  only  require 
especial  attention  at  the  present  time.  These 
are,  first,  the  Sthaviravadins  (Pali  Thervadins), 
and,  second,  the  Sarvastivadins. 

The  former  is  probably  the  school  which  keeps 
nearest  to  the  tenets  of  early  Buddhism,  but 
soon  lost  its  hold  over  India  proper, 
though  it  has  always  maintained  itself  in  Ceylon, 
Burma,  and  Siam.  The  Sarvastivadins  were  of 
a    more    scholastic    nature.     They    transformed 


12  INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

Buddhism  into  a  complete  and  consistent 
philosophy,  and  wrote  in  or  translated  their 
works  into  classical  Sanskrit,  while  the  more 
simple  Sthaviravadins  retained  the  more  collo- 
quial, popular,  and  vulgar  Pali.  The  Sarvas- 
tivadins  seem  to  have  gained  the  upper  hand  in 
India  some  time  before  the  birth  of  Christ,  and 
long  remained  the  most  important  school  of 
Indian  Hinayana.  Most  of  the  Hinayana  works 
translated  into  foreign  tongues,  such  as  Chinese 
or  Tibetan,  belonged  to  this  school,  and  though 
as  a  separate  school  it  almost  expired  with  the 
extinction  of  Buddhism  in  India,  it  had  an 
enormous  influence  on  the  philosophic  develop- 
ment of  the  later  sects  which  survived.  In  fact, 
the  Sarvastivadins  may  be  called  the  Hinayana 
school  par  excellence. 

Even  the  more  primitive  Sthaviravadin  school, 
which  prides  itself  upon  its  maintenance  of  the 
letter  of  the  law  as  preached  by  Qakyamuni,  has 
added  several  important  features.  The  most 
essential  point  is  that  in  practice  it  has  abandoned 
the  agnosticism  of  the  earlier  faith,  and  depending 
upon  the  fidelity  of  sense  impressions  proceeded 
to  systematize  objective  phenomena.  Thus,  for 
example,  it  accepted,  in  a  somewhat  modified 
form,  the  ancient  cosmography  of  India,  with  its 


INTRODUCTION  13 

geography,  astronomy,  and  account  of  the  in- 
tegration and  disintegration  of  the  material  {i.e., 
external)  universe.  Where  primitive  Buddhism 
had  ignored,  the  Sthaviravadins  denied,  the 
existence  of  an  Absolute.  Those  problems  which 
the  early  Buddhists  has  rejected  as  being  irrele- 
vant were  answered  by  the  Sthaviravadins,  even 
though  the  answers  were  relegated  to  the  body 
of  relative,  as  opposed  to  absolute,  truth.  The 
latter  consisted  only  of  such  doctrines  as  the 
three  marks  and  the  four  noble  truths. 

One  of  the  most  important  steps  to  be  taken 
was  the  analysis  of  the  parts  of  being,  approached 
in  the  first  place  from  the  psychological  point  of 
view.  Early  Buddhism  had  taught  that  instead 
of  an  ego  entity,  the  personality  consisted  of  five 
constituent  parts  (skandha),  viz.  : — Rupa  (Form, 
i.e.,  the  body) ;  Vedand  (sensation  or  feeling) ; 
Samjnd  (conception) ;  SamsMra  (here  meaning 
various  mental  qualities) ;  and  Vijndna  (con- 
sciousness). The  Sthaviravadins  divided  Form, 
the  material  world,  into  27  or  28  parts  ;  Sensa- 
tion into  3  or  5  ;  Conception  into  6  ;  Mental 
Qualities  into  52  ;  and  Consciousness  into  89 
parts. 

These  divisions  were  the  result  of  introspective 
analysis,  but  they  were  considered  absolute  and 


14   INTRODUCTION    TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

final.  These  several  divisions  constituted  the 
unchanging  elements  of  existence  from  which  all 
phenomena  are  compounded.  Buddhism  was 
thus  transformed  from  an  agnostic  and  positivist 
system,  concerned  only  with  suffering  and  the 
alleviation  of  suffering,  into  a  realistic  and 
materialistic  philosophy,  though  the  transforma- 
tion was  gradual  and  could  hardly  have  been 
recognized  at  the  time,  for  early  Buddhism  per- 
mitted the  analysis  of  subjective  states,  and  the 
elements  of  existence  of  the  Sthaviravadins  were 
enunciated  by  merely  subdividing  the  divisions 
of  early  Buddhism,  while  maintaining  the  sub- 
jective or  psychological  point  of  view. 

The  Sarvastivadins  are  to  the  Sthaviravadins 
what  the  Sthaviravadins  were  to  primitive  Budd- 
hism. The  materialism  and  realism  of  the  Stha- 
viravadins was  made  more  explicit  and  categori- 
cal ;  the  agnostic  and  psychological  aspect  was 
largely  lost  sight  of.  Buddhism  thus  became  a 
definite  and  rigid  philosophic  system,  instead  of 
remaining  a  body  of  truths  which  were  effective 
irrespective  of  metaphysics.  A  most  important 
step  was  made  when  the  elements  of  existence 
were  classified  from  an  external  or  objective  as 
well  as  from  a  subjective  point  of  view.  The  older 
or  subjective  classification  was  retained  (though 


INTRODUCTION  15 

the  subdivisions  of  each  skandha  were  somewhat 
different  from  those  of  the  Sthaviravadins),  but 
the  subdivisions  were  re-arranged  in  such  a  way 
as  to  constitute  a  complete  analysis  of  the 
external  universe. 

According  to  the  Abhidharma  Ko§a  these 
elements  (or  dharma)  are  75  in  number,  classified 
in  the  following  way  : — 

1.  Unconditioned  Elements  {AsamsJcrita  Dhar- 
ma) or  simple  elements,  so  called  because  they  do 
not  enter  into  combinations  with  other  elements. 
They  are  three  in  number,  of  which  Space  or 
Ether,  and  Nirvana  are  two. 

2.  Conditioned  Elements  {Samskrita  Dharma)^ 
or  complex  elements,  so  called  because  they 
enter  into  combinations,  though  themselves  sim- 
ple and  permanent.  Their  compounds  constitute 
the  phenomena  of  the  universe.  These  elements 
are  72  in  number,  divided  into  : — 

1.  Material  elements,  11  in  number. 

2.  Mind,  1  in  number. 

3.  Mental  Qualities,  such  as  love,  hate,  etc., 

46  in  number. 

4.  Miscellaneous  elements,  such  as  life,  decay, 

etc.,  14  in  number. 
These  elements  were  considered  permanent  and 
unchanging,   as   were   the  eighty   odd   physical 


16  INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

elements  of  the  scientists  of  a  generation  ago. 
In  their  present  state  all  phenomena  were  sup- 
posed to  be  impermanent  and  unstable,  but 
consisted  of  stable  and  unchanging  rudiments. 

TJie    Transition  from   Hinaydna   to    Mahdydna. 

In  its  finished  form  Hinayana  laid  great  em- 
phasis upon  two  doctrines.  These  were  : — (1) 
It  is  necessary  for  all  men  to  strive  after  Arhat- 
ship,  or  salvation  from  the  wheel  of  life  and  death. 
This  was  the  religious  phase.  (2)  All  phenomena 
are  unstable  compounds  of  a  certain  fixed  number 
of  stable  elements.  This  was  the  philosophic 
phase. 

Neither  one  of  these  doctrines  can  be  said  to 
be  in  strict  conformity  with  the  principles  of 
early  Buddhism.  As  regards  the  first,  in  Hina- 
yana a  distinction  in  hind  was  made  between  the 
Arhat,  he  who  has  merely  attained  Nirvana  or 
salvation,  and  the  Buddha  who  had  also  attained 
supreme  enlightenment,  or,  more  correctly,  three 
stages  were  enunciated  : — (1)  Arhatship,  or  mere 
salvation  ;  (2)  PratyeJca  Buddahood,  or  private 
Buddhahood,  supreme  enlightenment  for  oneself 
alone  ;  and  (3)  Buddahood  proper,  supreme  en- 
lightenment gained  in  order  to  teach  the  world. 
According  to   Hinayana  not  only  is   there  an 


INTRODUCTION  17 

immense  difierence  between  each  stage,  but  for 
the  average  man  the  only  possible  goal  is  Arhat- 
ship  ;  only  one  out  of  many  millions  may  aspire 
to  Pratyeka  Buddhahood,  and  only  one  in  many 
cycles  may  attain  Buddhahood.  In  primitive 
Buddhism,  on  the  other  hand,  little  distinction, 
save  one  of  degree,  is  made  between  the  Buddha 
and  his  illuminated  disciples,  and  the  highest 
goal  is  open  to  all. 

As  regards  the  second  point,  the  thorough- 
going anitya  or  impermanency  doctrine  of  primi- 
tive Buddhism  is  presumed  to  apply  to  all  parts 
of  the  universe.  Every  thing,  even  the  com- 
ponent parts  of  being,  are  in  a  perpetual  flux  or 
becoming,  so  that  the  doctrine  of  a  number  of 
fixed  and  changeless  elements,  constituting  an 
eternal  being,  seems  a  departure  from  the  original 
outlook  on  life.  To  be  consistent  even  the 
dharmas  or  elements  should  be  considered  com- 
plex, caused,  conditioned,  subject  to  change. 

On  both  these  points  Mahayana  rose  in  revolt 
against  Hinayana,  and  attempted  to  revert  to 
the  spirit  of  the  original  teachings.  They 
claimed  that  their  own  teachings  more  perfectly 
expressed  the  meaning  of  the  Buddha's  teach- 
ing, just  as  the  Protestants  wished  to  revert  to 
the  ideas  of  Primitive  Christianity.     It  must  be 


18  INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAyANA    BUDDHISM 

confessed,  however,  that  this  desire  for  reform 
resulted  only  in  the  formation  of  a  new  system 
of  religion  and  philosophy,  which  retained 
something  of  the  spirit  but  little  of  the  letter  of 
the  earlier  faith.  Let  us  take  for  example  the 
question  of  the  universality  of  the  Buddha  goal, 
whereby  the  distinction  in  kind  between  the 
Buddha  and  his  disciples  was  obliterated. 

Mahayana,  appealing  as  it  does  to  the  emo- 
tional and  devotional  elements,  regarded  the  Arhat 
ideal  as  selfish.  It  was  enamoured  of  the  idea 
of  self-sacrifice  and  proclaimed  that  those  who 
were  content  with  self-salvation  or  self-enlighten- 
ment might  aim  only  at  Arhatship  or  Pratyeka 
Buddhahood,  but  insisted  that  its  own  followers 
preferred  to  abandon  these  lower  aspirations  in 
order  that  they  might  become  all-saving  Buddhas. 
Once  this  doctrine  had  been  formulated  great 
emphasis  was  laid  upon  it,  and  we  find  many 
passages  breathing  the  noblest  altruism. 

Accordingly  in  early  Mahayana  all  its  own 
followers  were  called  Bodhisattvas,  Buddhas-to- 
be,  as  opposed  to  the  adherents  of  Hinayana, 
who  were  termed  (Jrdvalcas,  or  aspirants  only 
after  Arhatship. 

Later  Mahayana,  the  so-called  true  Mahayana, 
carried  this  idea  still  further,  and  taught  that 


INTRODUCTION  19 

supreme  and  perfect  enlightenment  (Buddha- 
hood)  was  the  final  goal  of  all.  The  first  half 
of  the  famous  Mahayana  scripture,  the  Lotus  of 
the  Good  Law  (Saddharma  Pundarika  Sutra), 
is  given  up  to  shewing  that  in  reality  there  is  but 
one  road,  that  the  other  goals  are  but  updya — 
devices — on  the  parts  of  the  Buddhas  for  the 
purpose  of  leading  the  world  away  from  sensu- 
ality and  materialism. 

Strangely  enough,  however,  though  throwing 
the  gates  of  Buddhahood  open  to  all,  Mahayana 
took  great  pains  to  exalt  the  dignity  and  powers 
of  the  Buddhas.  In  Hinayana  the  Buddhas  are 
men  pure  and  simple,  while  in  Mahayana  they 
are  looked  upon  as  divine  incarnations,  or  as 
material  expressions  of  the  Universal  Buddha, 
whose  existence  Mahayana  gradually  came  to 
teach. 

In  Hinayana  Sutras  sermons  are  delivered 
by  ^akyamuni,  generally  speaking  in  simple 
and  unaffected  phrases  so  as  to  make  the  auditor 
feel  the  presence  of  a  fatherly  and  serene  old 
philosopher,  advising  those  in  the  battle  of  life 
as  one  who  has  just  emerged  victorious  himself. 
In  Mahayana  SUtras,  on  the  other  hand,  we  find 
a  mysterious  and  transcendent  person  far  re- 
moved from  the  levels  of  ordinary  humanity, 


20  INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

who  is  listened  to  and  worshipped  by  countless 
hordes  of  beings,  celestial,  human,  and  demoniac, 
who  shower  flowers  upon  the  sage  while  he  per- 
forms his  stupendous  supernatural  deeds.  In 
the  Saddharma  Pundarika  Sutra,  for  example, 
Qakyamuni  sits  for  long  ages  in  meditation.  He 
is  the  Supreme  Euler  who  has  himself  led  count- 
less thousands  to  Enlightenment  during  countless 
ages,  and  who  never  really  dies  and  who  is  never 
really  born.  The  only  explanation  of  this  is 
that  ^akyamuni  and  all  the  other  Buddhas,  as 
well  as  the  Universal  Buddha,  are  one. 

The  Mahdydna  Buddhism  of  India. 

The  religious  aspect  of  Mahayana  developed 
some  time  immediately  prior  to  the  Christian 
era,  but  its  philosophical  aspect  was  formulated 
during  the  period  extending  from  the  first  to 
the  fifth  centuries  A.D.  Two  main  schools 
came  to  be  differentiated.  One  was  the  Madhya- 
mika  school,  founded  by  Nagarjuna  and  Arya 
Deva  in  the  first  and  second  centuries  A.D. 
The  other  was  the  Yogacarya  school,  founded 
by  Asanga  and  Vasubandhu  in  the  fourth 
century  A.D. 

The  Madhyamika  school,  which  was  thus  some 
centuries  earlier,   largely   devoted  itself  to   the 


INTRODUCTION  21 

consideration  of  the  second  point  on  which 
Mahayana  claimed  that  Hinayana  had  departed 
from  the  original  teaching — the  question  of  the 
existence  of  certain  permanent  stable  elements 
which  composed  the  universe.  In  accepting 
this  doctrine,  Hinayana,  as  we  have  said,  almost 
abandoned  its  spirit  of  insistence  upon  change 
and  becoming,  and  approached  the  standpoint 
of  Western  philosophy.  The  root  instinct  of  the 
religion  was  too  strong,  however,  and  in  the 
Madhyamika  philosophy  a  return  was  made, 
to  the  principle  of  eternal  transience  and  im- 
permanence. 

The  basis  of  this  undeveloped  or  early  Maha- 
yana is  (Junya  (literally  emptiness  or  the  Void). 
This  doctrine  has  been  frequently  totally  mis- 
understood in  the  West  and  taken  to  mean  the 
theory  of  the  non-existence  of  the  universe  or 
purely  Nihilistic  Idealism.  In  reality  Qunya  is 
simply  an  insistence  that  all  things  have  no  self- 
essence  ;  that  they  are  compounds,  unstable 
organisms  even  in  their  elemental  stage.  The 
science  of  the  present  generation  believes  that 
the  supposedly  rigid  physical  elements  are  not 
necessarily  permanent ;  that  they  may  be  broken 
down  ;  that  the  elements  may  themselves  prove 
to  be  compounds  possessing  the  essential  quali- 


22   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

ties  of  transformation  and  decay.  In  like 
manner  the  Qtinya  school  supposed  that  the 
Dharmas  (elements)  are  impern^anent  and  have 
no  existence-unto-themselves  ;  that  they  may  be 
broken  down  into  parts,  parts  into  sub-parts, 
and  so  on  eternally.  Accordingly  all  phenomena 
have  a  relative  as  opposed  to  an  absolute 
existence.  All  of  life  was  once  more  reduced 
to  a  single  underlying  flux,  a  stream  of  existence 
with  an  everlasting  becoming. 

In  a  word,  then,  the  Madhyamika  doctrine  of 
^unya  is  that  there  is  no  thing-unto-itself, 
nothing  with  a  self  essence,  nothing  that  cannot 
be  broken  up  until  we  reach  the  great 
transcendent  reality  which  is  so  absolute  that  it 
is  wrong  to  say  that  it  is  or  that  it  is  not.  This 
underlying  reality — the  principle  of  eternal  re- 
lativity, non-infinity — permeates  all  phenomena, 
allowing  expansion,  growth,  and  evolution,  which 
would  otherwise  be  impossible. 

It  is  easy  to  see  that  this  early  and  undeveloped 
Mahayana  idea  of  the  Eternal  Flux  was  the  germ 
of  the  later  doctrine  of  the  Absolute.  The 
doctrine  of  the  Madhyamika  school,  however, 
was  largely  a  negative  one.  It  reduced  all 
phenomena  to  a  constantly  changing  stream  of 


INTRODUCTION  23 

life,  but  concerning  the  nature  of  this  stream  of 
life  it  tells  us  little  or  nothing. 

The  next  stage  of  doctrinal  development,  as 
found  in  the  Yogacarya  school,  was  a  very 
important  one,  and  resulted  in  the  formulation 
of  a  remarkably  complete  system  of  idealism. 
The  stream  of  life  was  supposed  to  be  the  Essence 
of  mind,  a  fundamental  Mind  substance  that  was 
permanent  and  yet  ever  changing  like  the  ocean. 
From  this  all  the  elements  (and  the  75  elements 
of  the  earlier  school  became  100  in  the  Yogacarya 
doctrine)  and  therefore  all  phenomena  are  de- 
rived. It  was  called  the  Alaya  Vijndna,  re- 
pository consciousness,  yet  it  was  considered  to 
be  neither  matter  nor  mind,  but  the  basic  energy 
that  was  at  the  root  of  both. 

It  is  the  imperceptible  and  unknowable 
noumenon  behind  all  phenomena.  To  quote 
Kuroda  :  "In  contradistinction  to  the  fallacious 
phenomena  of  existence  there  is  the  true  Essence 
of  Mind.  The  Essence  of  Mind  is  the  entity 
without  ideas  and  without  phenomena  and  is 
always  the  same.  It  pervades  all  things,  and  is 
pure  and  unchanging  .  .  .  so  it  is  called 
Bh utatatJidta — permanent  reality . ' ' 

It  would  be  easy  to  exaggerate  the  importance 
of  this  doctrine  and  falsely  to  identify  it  with 


24   INTRODUCTION    TO   M  AH  AY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

more  developed  systems,  but  undoubtedly  it  lia8 
many  points  of  contact  with  certain  phases  of 
modern  Occidental  philosophy.  The  Alaya 
Vijnana  is  like  the  Elan  de  Vie  of  Bergson,  the 
Energy  of  Leibnitz,  or  the  Unconscious  of  Von 
Hartmann.  Like  the  last,  though  it  is  the 
essence  of  consciousness,  it  is  not  itself  conscious 
in  its  earlier  stages.  It  is  mental,  and  yet  there 
is  a  certain  objective  reality  about  it.  Each 
unit  of  life  may  be  regarded  as  a  vortex  in  the 
sea  of  life.  The  action  and  interaction  of  these 
units  one  with  another  and  with  the  common 
stream  brings  about  the  phenomenal  appearance 
of  the  Universe. 

Accordingly  the  Alaya  Vijnana  is  regarded  in 
three  aspects,  viz: — (1)  as  active,  or  the  seed  of 
percipient  consciousness  ;  (2)  as  passive,  as  the 
sensibilia  of  consciousness  ;  (3)  as  the  object  of 
false  belief,  inasmuch  as  being  the  root  of  self- 
consciousness,  each  person  comes  to  regard  him- 
self as  an  eternal  ego  unity. 

The  Early  3Iahdydna  Buddhism  of 
China  and  Japan. 

Buddhism  was  introduced  into  China  in  the 
first  century  A.D.,  and  was  firmly  established 
by  the  fourth  century.     It  was  introduced  into 


INTRODUCTION  25 

Japan  in  the  sixth  century,  and  was  firmly 
established  there  in  the  seventh.  The  important 
sects  of  Indian  Buddhism  were  introduced  into 
those  two  countries,  and  we  find  a  Bidon  or 
Kusha  sect  corresponding  to.  the  Sarvastivadin 
school,  a  Sanron  sect  corresponding  to  the 
Madhyamika  school,  and  a  Hosso  sect  correspond- 
ing to  the  Yogacarya  school.  These  were  all 
eclipsed,  however,  by  a  number  of  schools  which 
developed  in  China  and  Japan  itself.  In  these 
schools  we  may  distinguish  two  phases,  an 
earlier  and  theoretical  or  philosophical  phase, 
and  a  later  or  practical  and  religious  phase. 

The  early  or  philosophic  phase  is  best  repre- 
sented by  the  two  schools  of  Tendai  and  Kegon. 
The  Tendai  school  is  in  some  ways  a  further 
development  of  the  Madhyamika  school,  the 
Kegon  of  the  Yogacarya,  but  both  are  synthetic 
philosophies,  and  have  borrowed  largely  from  all 
available  sources.  The  doctrines  of  the  two 
schools  closely  resemble  each  other,  differing 
chiefly  on  points  of  emphasis,  so  that  for  the  time 
being  they  may  be  considered  together. 

Their  most  valuable  contribution  to  Buddhist 
philosophy  was  the  development  of  the  idea  of 
the  Absolute,  which  was  latent  in  both  the 
Madhyamika     and    Yogacarya     schools.      The 


26    INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

Essence  of  Mind,  or  the  Sea  of  Life  is  regarded  as 
the  one  fundamental  reality.  It  alone  can  be 
said  to  have  a  permanent  existence,  all  phenom- 
ena being  merely  ephemeral  manifestations  there- 
of. It  is  very  frequently  called  the  Middle 
Principle  (Chu),  since  it  transcends  both  Being 
(Ke)  and  Becoming  (Kii).  Chinese  Mahay anists 
answer  the  question  of  Being  and  Becoming  by 
the  simile  of  the  ocean.  The  ocean  is  the  Ab- 
solute, the  waves  are  life's  phenomena.  The 
ocean  is  always  changing.  Waves  are  constantly 
arising,  and  no  two  waves  are  ever  alike.  So  does 
the  stream  of  life  ever  go  surging  past,  never 
remaining  the  same.  Yet  there  is  a  certain 
stability,  a  certain  being,  a  fixity,  a  changeless- 
ness  in  this  very  changeability. 

The  doctrine  of  the  Absolute  of  most  Western 
philosophies  is  based  upon  the  idea  of  pure 
Being.  The  Mahayana  doctrine  of  the  Absolute 
(Bhutatathata)  evolved  from  the  idea  of  be- 
coming, yet  the  two  doctrines  are  strangely  v/ 
similar.  In  both  the  Absolute  is  the  sufficient 
reason  of  the  universe  ;  it  is  the  principle  of 
existence  which  transcends  but  includes  matter 
and  mind,  life  and  death,  sameness  and  difference, 
Samsara  (the  phenomenal  world)  and  Nirvana 
(the    noumenal    world).     The    Bhutatathata    of 


INTRODUCTION  27 

Mahayana  is  the  norm  of  life,  the  acme  of  being, 
the  warp  and  the  woof  of  the  universe.  It 
comes  near  to  Hegel's  conception  of  the  Absolute, 
inasmuch  as  it  is  not  only  the  force  behind 
evolution,  but  also  the  very  process  of  evolution 
itself. 

Eetaining,  as  Chinese  Mahayana  does,  the 
conception  that  all  existence  is  derived  from  the 
Alaya  Vijnana,  which,  in  turn,  has  its  essence  and 
supporting  principle  in  the  Bhutathata,  it 
declares  that  the  Absolute  is  both  identical  and 
non-identical  with  the  material  universe.  It  is, 
to  quote  the  ocean  simile  again,  as  if  the  water 
were  stirred  up  by  the  winds  of  ignorance  where- 
by the  waves  are  produced.  The  water  there- 
fore is  both  identical  and  not  identical  with  the 
waves.  To  quote  scholastic  verbiage,  the  Uni- 
verse is  but  a  mode  of  the  Universal. 

Preceding  systems  had  formulated,  as  we  shall 
presently  see,  the  doctrine  that  every  Buddha 
has  three  bodies,  the  DharmaMya,  the  Body  of 
the  Law,  the  Sambhogalcdya,  the  body  of  Com- 
pensation, and  the  Nirmanakdya,  or  the  body  of 
Transformation.  In  developed  Buddhism  the 
Bhiitatathata  is  regarded  as  a  sort  of  Universal 
Buddha-  Accordingly  it  was  likewise  considered 
to  be  possessed  of  the  three  bodies,  so  that  we 


28  INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

find  in  the  later  stages  an  almost  Christian  idea 
of  the  Trinity.  The  Dharmakaya  corresponds 
to  an  impersonalized  God  the  Father,  the 
Abstract  order  of  the  universe,  or  better,  Mr. 
Well's  Unmanifested  Deity,  the  Sambhogakaya 
a  more  personalized  ideation  of  the  Absolute  the 
symbol  of  moral  perfection  and  the  object  of 
devotion — Mr.  Well's  God  the  Invisible  King, 
and  the  Nirmanakaya  is  equivalent  to  the 
Christian  God  the  Son,  or  the  Absolute  as 
manifested  in  the  world  in  the  guise  of  a  human 
Buddha. 

The  Later   Mdhdydna  Buddhism  of  China  and 

Japan. 

The  later  schools  of  Chinese  and  Japanese 
Buddhism  are  not  so  much  doctrinal  develop- 
ments as  various  adaptations  of  the  foregoing 
philosophical  foundation.  The  most  important 
sects  were  the  Shingon  or  Mantra  sect,  the  Zen 
or  Dhyana  sect,  and  the  Jodo  or  Sukhavati  sect. 
All  of  them  agreed  in  accepting  the  older  philo- 
sophical foundations  but  gave  them  a  religious, 
and  to  a  large  extent  mystical  bias. 

The  Shingon  school  claims  to  be  the  hidden 
or  esoteric  doctrine  of  which  all  outward  or 
exoteric  doctrines   are   but   symbols.     The   full 


INTRODUCTION  29 

truth,  or  the  inner  mysteries  are  revealed  only  to 
those  who  have  been  initiated  into  the  order.    For 
the  uninitiate  the  Shingon  speaks  only  in  terms  ol 
parable    and    symbol.      The  Absolute  and   the 
various  aspects  of  the  Absolute  are  represented  as 
celestial   Buddhas  and  Bodhisattyas,  each  one 
with   a  mystic  name,  form,  colour,  and  sign — 
each    represented    by    a    certain    sound.     The 
Bhiitatathata   itself,    as    a    whole,    is   generally 
represented  as  Vairocana  or  the  Sun  Buddha. 
The  noumenal  aspect  of  the  universe  is  called 
the  Diamond  World  ;  the  phenomenal  aspect  the 
Womb  World,  and  sacred  charts  (mandala)  are 
drawn   illustrating  the  nature,   attributes,   and 
relations  of  each.     The  Shingon  sect  corresponds 
very    closely    to    the    Lamaism    of    Tibet    and 
Mongolia.     Both    are    derived    from    the    later 
phases  of  the  Yogacarya  sect  in  India,  about  the 
sixth   century    A.D,,   when   esotericism   became 
rampant  in  both  Hindu  and  Buddhist  circles. 

The  Zen  Dhyana  school  represents  a  different 
type  of  esotericism  or  mysticism.  The  basic  idea 
of  Zen  is  that  all  formulated  doctrines,  whether 
exoteric  or  esoteric  ;  all  books  ;  all  speech  ;  and 
even  all  thought  are  inadequate  to  express  the 
full  nature  of  absolute  truth.  Consequently 
Zen  refuses  to  place  complete  credence  in  any 


30   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

one  book,  or  collection  of  books,  Buddhist  or 
otherwise.  It  refuses  to  tie  itself  to  any  doctrine 
or  creed.  It  accepts  the  philosophy  of  the  Tendai 
and  Kegon  schools  from  a  relative  point  of  view, 
but  insists  that  absolute  truth  must  be  found  by 
each  man  for  himself  by  means  of  intuitional 
realization  to  be  gained  through  meditation. 
The  only  definite  teaching  to  be  found  in  the 
Zen  sect  is  that  every  man  is  possessed  of  the 
Bodhicitta  (the  heart  of  wisdom)  or  the  seed  of 
Buddhahood.  Every  man  is  a  sleeping  Buddha. 
Consequently  a  man  has  but  to  awaken  his 
Bodhicitta  by  meditation  for  him  to  gain  a 
direct  insight  into  the  nature  of  reality.  The 
Zen  sect  was  introduced  into  China  by  Bodhid- 
harma  in  the  sixth  century,  and  into  Japan  by 
Eisai  in  1191. 

The  Sukhavati  doctrine,  more  particularly  as 
represented  by  the  Shin  sect,  the  reformed 
branch  of  Mahayana  Buddhism  may  be  called 
the  mysticism  of  exclusive  adoration.  In  this 
school  the  Absolute  or  Universal  Buddha  is 
symbolized  as  Amitabha  the  Buddha  of  Infinite 
light,  or  Amitayus,  the  Buddha  of  Infinite  Time, 
and  as  such  is  the  object  of  fervent  devotion. 
Enlightenment,  or  Nirvana,  or  Buddhahood  is 
symbolized  by  the  Paradise,  SukhSvatl,  or  JMo 


INTRODUCTION  31 

of  Amitabha.  Eebirth  in  this  paradise  is  to  be 
gained  by  self-forgetting  adoration  of  the 
supreme.  In  early  days  Amitabha  may  have 
been  regarded  as  an  historical  Buddha,  and  his 
paradise  a  place  to  be  gained  by  death,  but,  in 
the  developed  doctrine  of  Chinese  and  more 
especially  Japanese  Buddhism,  we  are  told  that 
Amitabha  is  without  beginning  and  without  end, 
that  he  is  but  a  symbol  for  an  inexpressible 
reality,  that  rebirth  into  his  paradise  is  nothing 
more  than  the  awakening  of  the  Bodhicitta  here 
on  earth,  and  that  this  Bodhicitta  is  to  be 
awakened  by  love  and  by  faith.  At  the  present 
time  both  Chinese  and  Japanese  Buddhism  is 
dominated  by  the  Zen  and  Jodo  ideas — Zen 
being  an  embodiment  of  absolute  truth  for  the 
educated,  and  Jodo  its  relative  symbol  for  the 
mass  of  the  people. 


f 

CHAPTER    1 

EPISTEMOLOGY    AND     LOGIC 

All  understanding  of  Buddhist  metaphysics 
must  be  based  upon  a  comprehension  of  its  theory 
of  knowledge.  This  theory  we  had  best  consider 
under  three  aspects  : — (1)  The  nature  of  truth, 
(2)  The  methods  of  ascertaining  truth,  and  (3) 
The  methods  of  demonstrating  truth. 

1.  The  Nature  of  Truth. 
In  Buddhism  we  find  great  emphasis  laid  upon 
the  two-fold  and  the  three-fold  aspects  of  truth. 
In  a  primitive  form  the  two-fold  division  is  to  be 
found  in  Hinayana  Buddhism,  and  probably 
dates  back  to  the  time  of  Qakyamuni  himself, 
but  was  first  emphasized  by  the  Madhyamika 
school  of  Mahayana. 

According  to  this  there  are  two  forms  of  truth, 
Relative  Truth  (Samvritti-satya  or  Zokutai) 
and  Absolute  Truth  (Paramartha-satya  or 
Shintai).  In  earlier  days  this  distinction  was 
applied  to  differentiate  those  doctrines  which 
were    an    essential    and    fundamental    part    of 


EPISTEMOLOGY    AND    LOGIC  33 

Buddhism  (such  as  the  Four  Noble  Truths,) 
which  were  absolutely  true  and  changeless,  and 
those  doctrines  which  were  merely  adopted  by 
Buddhist  metaphysicians  to  fill  out  a  philosophic 
conception  of  the  universe,  and  which  would 
necessarily  be  modified  as  new  information  came 
to  light.  To  this  category  belong  the  various 
theories  of  cosmography,  etc. 

Later  Buddhism  slightly  modified  this  con- 
ception. Absolute  Truth  was  equivalent  to 
complete  and  perfect  enlightenment.  Words 
being  but  symbols  are  incapable  of  describing 
adequately  or  defining  it.  Thought  consists  of 
a  number  of  concepts,  and  any  concept  being 
equally  a  symbol  and  therefore  inadequate,  it 
follows  that  a  knowledge  of  Absolute  Truth 
cannot  be  gained  merely  by  a  process  of  ratiocina- 
tion. While,  however.  Absolute  Truth  is  in- 
conceivable it  is  not  unrealizable  for  through 
spiritual  development  we  may  gain  direct 
illumination,  more  or  less  adequate,  according 
to  our  nature  and  the  stage  of  our  development. 

Once  we  have  thus  acquired  a  direct  insight  into 
truth  we  may  inadequately  attempt  to  clothe  it 
in  words  and  concepts,  and  crystallize  it  into 
dogmas,  as  a  guide  to  the  later  seekers  after 
truth.     It  is,  however,  like  trying  to  describe 


34    INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

the  colours  of  the  rainbow  to  a  man  blind  from 
birth. 

This  crystallization  of  truth  by  formulation  of 
doctrine  is  what  the  Mahayanists  call  relative 
truth.  Absolute  Truth  is  ever  the  same,  while 
relative  truth  is  ever  advancing,  coming  nearer 
and  nearer  to  an  approximation  of  Absolute 
Truth,  as  each  generation  taking  the  doctrine  of 
its  predecessors  is  able  more  succinctly  to 
interpret  it  and  compare  it  with  new  realizations 
of  Absolute  Truth.  While,  however,  the  smaller 
circle  of  relative  truth  is  constantly  expanding 
and  thereby  approaching  in  size  the  greater  circle 
of  Absolute  Truth,  the  two  can  never  coincide, 
since  the  latter  is  infinite,  and  the  former  must 
ever  deal  with  finite  instruments,  such  as  the 
brain  or  speech. 

Mahay  ana  declares  that  all  theories,  hypo- 
theses, doctrines,  whether  verbal  or  incorporated 
in  scriptures,  whether  scientific,  philosophical  or 
religious,  and  including  its  own  doctrines  of 
Nirvana,  the  Universal  Buddha,  etc.,  belong  to 
the  body  of  relative  truth,  and  must,  therefore, 
be  modified  with  the  course  of  time.  This 
conception  of  the  nature  of  truth  greatly  facili- 
tates the  doctrinal  development  of  later  Budd- 
hism, allowing  for  the  evolution  of  new  theories 


EPISTEMOLOGY    AND    LOGIC  35 

and  interpretations,  while  the  simpler  theory  of 
truth  maintained  by  the  Southern  Buddhists 
caused  them  to  stick  fast  to  the  letter  of  the  law 
as  taught  by  ^akyamuni. 

The  three-fold  division  of  truth  is  nothing 
more  than  a  restatement  of  this  in  other  terms. 
The  three  classes  are  (1)  illusion  (parikalpita), 
(2)  relative  knowledge  (paratantra),  (3)  absolute 
knowledge  (parini§panna).  The  first  is  abso- 
lutely false,  as  when  a  rope  lying  in  the  road  is 
mistaken  for  a  snake.  The  second  is  a  pragmatic 
comprehension  of  the  nature  of  things  sufficient 
for  ordinarj^  purposes,  as  when  the  rope  is  seen 
to  be  a  rope.  The  third  deals  with  the  real  and 
ultimate  nature  of  things,  when  the  rope  is 
analysed  and  its  true  nature  understood.  The 
only  real  difference  between  the  two -fold  and 
the  three-fold  divisions  of  truth  is  that  finite 
knowledge  is  separated  into  falsehood  and  that 
which  is  relatively  true,  and  the  latter  exalted 
to  its  proper  position,  since  otherwise,  by  neglect 
of  this  important  phase,  intellectual  progress 
would  be  barred. 

2.     Methods  of  Ascertaining  Truth. 

Early  Buddhism  had  no  elaborate  epistemology 
or  logic,  but  in  the  period  of  the  full  development 


36   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

of  Mahayana  Buddhism  we  find  the  following 
classification  of  the  means  of  evaluating  know- 
ledge : — 

7.    INDIRECT. 
1.   Tradition. 

a.  Exoteric. 

b.  Esoteric. 
II.     DIRECT. 

1.  Experience. 

a.  Empirical. 

b.  Intuitional. 

2.  Reason. 

a.  Pure  reason. 

b.  Practical  reason. 

A  word  must  be  said  concerning  each  of  these 
points. 

Buddhism  has  both  an  external  and  an  internal 
standard  of  truth.  The  saints  and  sages  of  the 
past  have  had  a  direct  insight  into  the  nature  of 
reality,  and  in  consequence  the  truth  which  they 
expounded  must  be  accepted  by  all.  On  the 
other  hand  such  sages  have  only  achieved  en- 
lightenment through  means  which  are  open  to 
us  all.  By  process  of  experience,  both  material 
and  spiritual,  and  by  reason,  both  pure  and 
practical,  we  may  test  the  validity  of  each  of 
their  positions  and  reinterpret  their  meanings 


EPISTEMOLOGY    AND    LOGIC  37 

into  closer  accordance   with   the  knowledge  of 
the  time. 

Tradition  is  of  two  kinds,  exoteric  and  esoteric. 
The  first  is  embodied  in  the  external  dogmas  of 
Buddhism  as  expounded  in  the  Sutras,  Vinayas, 
and  the  Abhidharmas,  which  are  open  so  that  all 
the  world  may  read,  while  many  branches  of 
Mahayana  insist  that  beyond  this  there  is  a 
secret  tradition  which  may  never  be  written 
down,  which  requires  proper  training  and 
initiation  before  it  can  be  understood. 

Experience  was  likewise  divided  into  two 
phases.  The  first  is  merely  the  ascertainment  of 
truth  through  ordinary  physical  sense  organs 
and  sense  objects.  Provided  the  sense  organs 
and  the  sense  perceiving  aspects  of  consciousness 
are  normally  constituted  the  data  which  they 
furnish  may  be  taken  as  valid,  at  least  for  the 
establishment  of  relative  as  opposed  to  Absolute 
Truth.  Owing  to  the  limitations  of  the  physical 
senses  and  the  brain  machine,  Absolute  Truth 
can  only  be  glimpsed  by  transcending  them  and 
gaining  knowledge  through  intuition  or  direct 
realization.  For  such  purposes  all  doctrines, 
theories,  and  scriptures  are  but  fingers  pointing 
to  the  moon,  and  have  no  inherent  validity. 
This  doctrine  is  called  the  doctrine  of  Ton  or 


38   INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

suddenness,  i.e.,  the  means  whereby  knowledge 
may  be  gained  at  one  stroke  through  transcen- 
dental apperception  without  waiting  to  piece 
together,  one  by  one,  the  data  of  empirical 
knowledge. 

Reason  is  the  means  whereby  we  piece  to- 
gether the  separate  and  unconnected  sense  data, 
whether  empirical  or  transcendental,  and  thereby 
make  a  system  or  a  new  co-ordination  of  facts, 
enabling  us  to  lay  down  generalizations  and 
broad  formulae.  Owing  to  the  whole  trend  of 
its  philosophy  Buddhism  could  not  place  such 
great  stress  upon  the  importance  of  abstract  or 
pure  reason  as  could  Plato  and  Aristotle.  Never- 
theless even  the  Hinayana  sutras  proclaim  that 
nothing  is  to  be  accepted  that  is  not  in  accordance 
with  reason,  and  in  the  metaphysical  systems  of 
Mahayana  the  process  of  abstract  reason  was  the 
method  most  frequently  employed,  more 
particularly  in  such  schools  as  the  Tendai  and 
the  Avatamsaka  or  Kegon. 

Yet,  inasmuch  as  Buddhism  taught  that  the 
ephemeral  nature  of  external  reality  and  of 
consciousness  was  an  obstacle  to  the  ascertain- 
ment of  Absolute  Truth  by  sophism  or  bare 
deductive  reasoning,  we  early  find  a  tendency 
towards  pragmatism,  or  a  substitution  of  practic- 


EPISTEMOLOGY    AND    LOGIC  39 

al  for  pure  reasoning,  or  a  tendency  to  judge  of 
the  validity  of  a  doctrine  by  its  effect  upon  human 
life.  Thus  for  example  in  the  Hinayana  sutras, 
in  discussing  what  we  might  call  the  freedom  of 
the  will,  we  find  the  Buddha  saying  "  Some 
Qramanas  and  Brahmins  there  are  who  maintain 
that  whatever  a  man  has  in  this  life  ...  is 
purely  due  to  predestination.  Others  say  that 
it  is  due  to  the  will  of  Igvara  (God),  others 
again  that  it  is  due  to  blind  chance.  Now,  O 
monks,  when  I  find  Qramanas  and  Brahmins 
holding  or  preaching  such  views  I  .  .  .  say  to 
them,  '  So  then,  you  must  acknowledge  that 
men  become  murderers,  thieves,  etc. . .  on  account 
of  Fate,  Igvara's  will,  or  blind  chance.  Accord- 
ingly all  attempts  at  improvement  or  distinction 
between  right  and  wrong,  become  of  no  avail. 
Such  being  the  case  the  moral  regeneration  of 
the  fallen  becomes  impossible.'  This  sort  of 
reasoning  must  silence  those  who  hold  any  of  the 
three  views  mentioned  above  ."  The  pragmatic 
nature  of  this  argument  is  obvious. 

In  Mahayana  we  find  the  doctrine  carried 
somewhat  further,  and  associated  with  what  we 
might  call  the  symbolic  theory  of  truth,  i.e.,  that 
the  nature  of  absolute  truth  is  so  great  and  so 
infinite  that  it  can  never  be    completelj'    and 


40   INTRODUCTION    TO    MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

adequately  grasped  by  finite  logic,  yet  neverthe- 
less it  may  be  expressed  or  indicated  by  a 
symbol  which  teaches  us  something  of  its  essence 
without  limiting  it  by  definition. 

Thus  the  nature  of  the  Absolute  (Bhfttata- 
thata)  can  never  be  properly  formulated,  yet 
by  symbolizing  it  as  the  universal  Buddha, 
as  Amitabha,  Infinite  Light,  or  Amitayut^, 
Infinite  Time,  we  may  have  a  focus  for  devotion 
which  may  remain  as  a  living  and  vital  stimulus 
towards  the  spiritual  life  even  when  increasing 
knowledge  may  cause  us  to  reinterpret  our  sym- 
bols. This  is  the  doctrine  of  upaya  or  hoben, 
means  or  devices,  or  accommodations  of  truth 
to  the  minds  of  the  hearers,  which  is  really  the 
basis  of  the  Sukhavati  or  Paradise  doctrine. 

3.  Methods  of  Demonstrating  Truth. 
Buddhist  logic  which  is  comprised  in  a  sort  of 
inverted  syllogism  passed  through  a  very  inter- 
esting evolution.  From  the  first  it  was  obviously 
a  logic  of  demonstration  of  ideas  already  enter- 
tained, rather  than  a  pretence  of  deduction  of 
previously  unknown  facts,  as  was  claimed,  and 
now  considered  falsely  claimed,  by  Aristotelian 
logic,  with  which  it  baa  otherwise  much  in 
common. 


EPISTEMOLOGY    AND    LOGIC  41 

Again  the  frankly  Becoming  and  consequently 
anti-rational  position  of  Buddhism  hindered  the 
evolution  of  its  logic.  Hinayana  Buddhism,  in 
fact,  never  produced  any  logical  system,  and  even 
the  reasoning  of  the  early  Madhyamika  and 
Yogacarya  scholars  with  their  five-fold  syllogism 
is  largely  based  on  analogical  reasoning,  the 
citing  of  individual  homogeneous  and  hetero- 
geneous examples  rather  than  the  proof  of  a  fact 
by  citing  a  universal  and  invariable  law. 

Dignaga  or  Mahadignaga  was  the  first  to 
devote  himself  almost  exclusively  to  logic,  and 
with  him  Buddhist  logic,  properly  so  called, 
begins.     His  syllogism  is  as  follows  : — 

Thesis,     e.g. — Socrates    is    mortal. 

Reason,     e.g. — Because  Socrates  is  a  man. 

Example,     e.g. — And  all  men  are  mortal. 
With  this  may  be  compared  the  Occidental 
formula  : — 

Major  Premise. — All  men  are  mortal. 

Minor  Premise. — Socrates  is  a  man. 

Conclusion. — Therefore  Socrates  is  mortal. 
Let  us  examine  each  of  these  features  some- 
what more  in  detail : — 

1.  The  thesis  is  divided  into  the  subject  or 
minor  term  (pakga)  e.g.,  "  Socrates,"  and  pre- 
dicate or  major  term  (sadhya)  e.g.,  "  mortal." 


42  INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

Neither  subject  nor  predicate  is  itself  to  be 
disputed,  but  only  the  thesis  or  proposition 
concerning  their  relationship. 

2.  The  reason  or  premise  must  be  a  known 
truth,  or  a  truth  accepted  by  all.  Consequently, 
Dign^ga  wiU  place  here  only  those  facts  known 
directly,  i.e.,  through  reason  or  experience,  and 
not  those  facts  which  are  known  indirectly,  e.g., 
by  tradition,  exoteric,  or  esoteric. 

3.  The  same  thing  must  hold  true  of  the 
Example,  which  is  of  a  more  abstract  nature. 
The  word  example  (drstanta)  is  singularly  un- 
fitted to  denote  the  idea  of  the  major  premise, 
and  is  derived  from  the  period  when  the  universal 
law  of  necessary  concomitance  was  unknown, 
and  in  its  place  there  was  cited  one  or  two 
analogous  examples.  Thus  the  old  syllogism 
would  have  run  : — 

Thesis.     Sound  is  non-eternal. 

Reason.     Because  it  is  produced. 

Example.  Like  a  pot,  and  not  like  space, 
while  with  Dignaga  it  is  of  course  : — 

Thesis.     Sound   is   non-eternal. 

Reason.     Because  it  is  produced. 

Example.  All  produced  things  are  non-eternal, 
to  which  might  bo  added,  purely  for  purposes 
of   elucidation,   and    not   for  proof,   the   homo- 


EPISTEMOLOGY    AND    LOGIC  43 

geneous  example  "  like  a  pot,"  and  the  hetero- 
geneous example  "  not  like  space." 

Dignaga's  rule  for  the  formation  of  his  new 
example  was  to  "  take  the  reason  for  the  subject, 
and  the  major  term  for  the  predicate."  Thus 
for  example  : — 

Thesis.     AU  A  is  B. 

Reason.     All  A  is  C. 

Example.     All  C  is  B, 
or,  in  other  words,  to  cite  another  syllogism  :— 

Thesis.     All  diamonds  are  combustible. 

Reason.     Because  all  diamonds  are  carbon.    . 

Example.     And  all  carbon  is  combustible. 

This  brings  us  to  a  discussion  of  the  famous 
doctrine  of  the  3  phases  of  the  reason  or  middle 
term  (hetu). 

1.  The  first  deals  with  the  relation  between 
the  middle  term  (C)  and  the  minor  term  or 
subject  (A).  2.  The  second  deals  with  the 
relation  between  the  middle  term  (C)  and  the 
major  term  or  predicate  (B).  3.  The  third 
deals  with  the  relation  between  the  middle 
term  (C)  and  the  heterogeneous  example  (which 
we  will  call  D). 

For  a  syllogism  to  be  valid  : — 1.  0  must 
include  the  whole  of  A,  e.g.^  the  word  carbon  must 
include  all  and  not  merely  some  of  diamonds. 


44   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

2.  All  C  must  invariably  apply  to  B,  but  it  need 
not  include  all  B,  e.g.,  all  carbon  must  be  com- 
bustible, though  combustible  things  may  include 
other  things  than  carbon.  3.  C  must  include 
no  D  or  Non-B,  e.g.,  carbon  must  possess  no 
non-combustible  qualities. 

Finally  we  come  to  the  fallacies,  the  presence 
of  which  in  either  the  thesis,  the  reason,  or  the 
example  would  make  the  syllogism  invalid. 
We  are  told  that  there  are  9  fallacies  of  the 
thesis,  14  fallacies  of  the  reason,  and  10  fallacies 
of  the  example,  but  these  as  lying  within  the 
realm  of  pure  technicality,  are  outside  the  scope 
of  our  present  undertaking. 

4.     Absolute  Truth,  and  Buddhist  Doctrines. 

Such  then  is  the  Buddhist  theory  of  the  nature 
of  truth,  and  the  means  of  ascertaining  and 
demonstrating  it.  The  question  then  arises,  does 
Buddhism  claim  a  unique  possession  of  truth, 
does  it  state  that  its  own  doctrines  are  the  sole, 
final,  and  absolute  embodiments  of  reality  ? 

Such  is  far  from  the  case.  Its  doctrine  of  the 
distinction  between  Absolute  Truth  and  relative 
truth,  caused  it  to  state  that  all  of  its  own  doc- 
trines, and  theories,  as  well  as  the  sacred  works 
containing    them,    belong    exclusively    to    the 


EPISTEMOLOGY    AND    LOGIC  45 

realm  of  relative  truth,  and  are,  therefore,  liable 
to  error,  and  capable  of  constant  improvement, 
that  other  systems  of  thought  no  less  than  its 
own  are  equally  but  the  imperfect  embodiments 
of  inadequate  glimpses  of  absolute  reality.  This 
idea,  more  or  less  common  to  all  forms  of  Maha- 
yana  Buddhism,  is  emphasized  by  the  Dhyana 
sect. 

The  mode  of  expression  adopted  by  a  modern 
leader  of  the  school,  Kaiten  Nukariya  in  his 
"  Religion  of  the  Samurai  "  is  very  interesting  : — 

"  The  scripture  is  no  more  nor  less  than  the 
finger  pointing  to  the  moon  of  Buddhahood. 
When  we  recognize  the  moon  and  enjoy  its 
benign  beauty,  the  finger  is  of  no  use.  As  the 
finger  has  no  brightness  whatever  so  the  scripture 
has  no  holiness  whatever.  The  scripture  is 
religious  currency  representing  spiritual  wealth. 
It  does  not  matter  whether  the  money  be  gold 
or  sea-shells  or  cows.  It  is  a  mere  substitute. 
What  it  stands  for  is  of  paramount  importance. 

"  Away  with  your  stone  knife.  Do  not  watch 
the  stake  against  which  a  running  hare  once 
struck  its  head  and  died.  Do  not  wait  for 
another  hare.  Another  may  not  come  forever. 
Do  not  cut  out  the  side  of  the  boat  from  which 
you  dropped  your  sword  to  mark  where  it  sunk. 


46    INTRO  DUCT  IO\    TO    MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

The  boat  is  ever  moving  on.  The  canon  is  the 
window  out  of  which  we  observe  the  grand 
spiritual  scenery  of  spiritual  nature.  To  hold 
communion  directly  with  it  we  must  get  out  of 
the  window.  It  is  a  mere  stray  fly  that  is  always 
buzzing  within  it  struggling  to  get  out.  Those 
who  spend  most  of  their  lives  in  the  study  of  the 
scriptures  are  religious  flies,  good  for  nothing  but 
their  buzzing  about  nonsensical  technicalities. 
It  is  on  this  account  that  Einzai  declared  '  The 
twelve  divisions  of  the  Buddhist  canon  are 
nothing  better  than  waste  paper.'  " 

After  outlining  the  "  Relative  Truth "  re- 
garding the  Absolute  Nukariya  goes  on  to  say  : — 

"  Has  then  the  divine  nature  of  the  Universal 
Spirit  been  completely  and  exhaustively  re- 
vealed to  our  Enlightened  Consciousness  1  To 
this  question  we  would  answer  in  the  negative, 
for  so  far  as  our  limited  experience  is  concerned 
Universal  Spirit  reveals  itself  as  a  being  with 
profound  wisdom  and  boundless  mercy  ;  this 
nevertheless  does  not  imply  that  this  conception 
is  the  only  possible  and  complete  one.  It  goes 
on  to  disclose  a  new  phase,  to  add  a  new  truth. 
The  subtlest  logic  of  old  is  a  mere  quibble  of  now- 
a-days.  .  .  .  New  theories  are  formed,  new 
discoveries  are  made  only  to  jfive  way  to  newer 


EPISTEMOLOGY    AND    LOGIC  47 

theories  and  newer  discoveries.  New  ideale 
realized  or  new  desires  satisfied  are  sure  to 
awaken  new  and  stronger  desires.  Not  an  instant 
life  remains  the  same,  but  it  rushes  on  amplify- 
ing and  enriching  itself  from  the  dawn  of  time 
to  the  end  of  eternity." 


CHAPTEE    II 

THE   NATUEE   OF  THE    ABSOLUTE    A^'D 
ITS   EELATION   TO  THE   UNIVEESE 

1.      The  Outlook  on  Life 

Questions  concerning  the  outlook  on  life  have 
always  played  an  integral  part  in  Buddhist 
philosophy.  In  fact,  in  its  essence,  Buddhism  is 
not  an  analysis  of  the  ultimate  nature  of  existence 
or  an  explanation  of  the  noumenon  which  lies 
behind  phenomena,  but  it  is  an  interpretation 
of  the  good  and  bad  of  life,  taken  as  a  whole  and 
unanalysed. 

Like  all  other  phases  of  Buddhist  thought  its 
theory  of  the  proper  evaluation  of  life  has 
undergone  great  evolution  and  modification. 
Its  various  ramifications  may  best  be  considered 
under  three  stages,  which,  for  want  of  better 
terms,  we  may  call,  (1)  absolute  pessimism,  (2) 
absolute  optimism,  and  (3)  relative  pessimism. 
The  first  is  associated  with  primitive  and  Hina- 
yana  Buddhism  ;  the  second  with  the  doctrines 
of  the  various  schools  of  unreformed  Mahay^ua  ; 


THE    NATURE    OF    THE    ABSOLUTE  49 

the     third     with     the     reformed     branch      of 
MahSyana. 

[a).  Absolute  Pessimum. 

Primitive  Buddhism  began  by  saying,  as  we 
know,  (1)  all  is  impermanent,  (2)  all  is  lacking  a 
self,  (3)  all  is  sorrowful.  The  very  nature  of 
phenomenal  life  is  transient,  and  consequently 
all  joys  are  transient.  Where  there  is  birth 
there  is  necessarily  old  age,  disease,  and  death. 
Those  whom  we  love  are  estranged,  or  are  taken 
from  us.  Achievement  is  disillusionment.  The 
few  benefit  at  the  expense  of  the  many,  and  even 
the  few  find  no  real  enjoyment  in  life. 

This  state  of  affairs  holds  true  not  merely  for 
the  present  earthly  existence,  but  for  all  possible 
forms  of  life,  whether  in  heaven  or  hell,  whether 
in  the  past,  present,  or  future.  Consequently 
for  primitive  Buddhism,  and  for  Hinayana 
Buddhism  life,  qua  life,  has  no  fascination.  It 
can  find  peace  and  satisfaction  only  in  emancipa- 
tion from  all  known  forms  of  existence,  in  com- 
plete escape  from  the  phenomenal  world,  in  the 
annihilation  of  bodily  and  mental  existence, 
namely  Mrvana. 

Nirvana,  to  be  sure,  is  purely  a  state  of  mind 
obtainable  anywhere  and  at  any  time,  and  is  to 


50  INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

be  achieved  while  still  in  the  flesh,  but  as  life  or 
the  corporate  personality  is  only  formed  as  the 
result  of  ignorance  and  desire  in  the  past,  when 
the  Arhat,  he  who  has  attained  Nirvana,  dies  no 
new  personality  can  be  formed,  and  certainly, 
from  our  material  point  of  view,  the  personality 
is  wiped  out  of  existence. 

This  is  what  is  known  as  the  8hd1cyoku-teki  no 
Nehan  or  the  negative  view  of  Nirvana,  where 
life  is  compared  to  the  waning  of  the  moon. 
Here  the  moon  is  compared  to  the  sins  and 
sorrows  of  life.  Gradually  it  wanes  until  finally 
there  is  nothing  left. 

(&).  Absolute  Optimism. 
All  this  was  changed  by  the  formulation  of  the 
doctrine  of  the  Absolute,  the  Universal  Buddha, 
or  the  Essence  of  Mind,  the  supreme  ideal 
which  is  behind  all  life  and  from  which  all  things 
draw  their  sustenance. 

Every  sentient  being  is  possessed  of  the 
Bodhicitta  (the  wisdom  heart)  or  the  seed  or 
kernel  of  enlightenment.  This  is  the  spark  of 
Buddhahood  which  has  only  to  be  awakened  to 
spring  into  the  flame  of  perfection  or  Buddhahood. 
Consequently  all  forms  of  life  spring  from  the 
noumenon  which  is  itself  good,  which  is  possessed 


THE    NATURE    OF    THE    ABSOLUTE  51 

of  the  four-fold  qualities  of  Jo  purity,  raku 
pleasure,  ga  self  essence,  and  jO  permanence. 
All  phenomenal  life  is  bad  only  because  it  is 
relative,  incomplete,  imperfect,  because  it  in- 
adequately expresses  the  absolute,  because  it  is 
bounded  and  conditioned,  for  latent  within  each 
phenomenon  is  supreme  bliss. 

Nirvana  consists  not  in  escape  from  the  world, 
but  in  the  unlocking  of  the  hidden  nature,  the 
development  of  the  sleeping  Buddha,  the  un- 
folding of  potentialities.  It  is  the  fruition  of 
life  rather  than  its  denial.  Sin  and  sorrow  are 
not  so  much  exterminated  as  transmuted  into 
holiness  and  joy. 

This  is  known  as  the  Shakkyoku-teki  no 
Nehan  or  the  positive  Nirvana,  in  which  Nirvana 
is  compared  to  the  waxing  of  the  moon.  The 
moon  is  the  Bodhicitta,  which  steadily  grows  in 
intensity  until  the  full  moon  of  Buddhahood  be 
reached. 

(<j).  Relative  Pessimism. 

Later  followed  the  inevitable  reaction.  When 
the  world  is  considered  all  perfect,  men  cease  to 
strive  for  the  cessation  of  the  imperfect.  Sin, 
sorrow,   and   misfortune   are   brushed   aside  as 


52   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

aspects  of  the  whole  by  which  its  absolutivity 
may  be  more  adequately  judged. 

Shinran,  the  founder  of  the  Shin  school  of 
Buddhism  (13th  century  A.D.),  accepted  the 
philosophy  of  unreformed  Mahayana  Buddhism, 
but  gave  it  a  practical  turn.  Though  the  world 
be  potentially  good  and  all  men  possessed  of 
the  Bodhicitta,  yet  do  grief  and  doubt  assail  us. 
Meditation  upon  the  Absolute  may  suffice  the 
metaphysician,  but  the  man  in  the  street  is  left 
disconsolate.  Weak  mortality  is  unable  to 
awaken  the  Bodhicitta,  and  for  such  the  older 
philosophies  give  no  help. 

Though  acting  on  these  ideas  Shinran  did  not 
deny  the  validity  of  the  older  doctrines,  but  he 
devoted  his  life  to  formulating  them  in  such  a 
way  that  they  might  serve  as  a  comfort  and  a 
stimulus.  Looked  at  from  the  relative  point  of 
L/view,  so  long  as  our  hearts  are  bent  upon 
external  pleasures,  or  are  in  dependence  upon 
material  things,  there  is  no  true  happiness  or 
peace  of  mind.  Anguish  seizes  upon  us,  and  we 
find  ourselves  forlorn  and  hopeless. 
I  .Salvation,  however,  may  be  found  in  under- 
standing the  true  meaning  behind  the  words 
Amida,  Tariki,  and  Ojo.  Amida,  (Sanskrit 
Amitabha)  is  a  symbol  of  the  Infinite,  the  sum 


THE    NATURE    OF    THE    ABSOLUTE  53 

total  of  our  highest  aspirations.  Tariki  (liter- 
ally other  power)  is  a  complete  setting  aside  of 
personal  motives,  of  self- aspiration  in  a  complete 
adoration  of  the  supreme.  It  is,  as  we  have 
said,  a  mysticism  of  exclusive  adoration.  This 
awakens  the  Busshin  or  Buddha  heart  (Bodhi- 
citta)  which  results  in  Ojo,  rebirth  in  Paradise, 
a  rebirth  which  takes  place  not  merely  at  death, 
but  at  the  moment  in  life  of  complete  self- 
abnegation,  thereby  differing  from  the  older 
Sukhavati  doctrine,  which  gave  a  purely  material 
and  post-mortem  position  to  Paradise. 

Life  then  is  relatively  evil,  that  is,  evil  so  long 
as  we  place  our  trust  in  anything  save  Amida, 
but  becomes  a  resting  place,  a  temporary  abode 
of  the  Bodhicitta,  when  once  the  latter  has  been 
awakened  by  unselfish  adoration.  As  Amida  is 
eternal,  so  is  the  Bodhicitta  eternal,  but  whether 
after  death  it  retains  its  discreteness,  or  is  lost  in 
the  sea  of  perfection,  only  the  awakened  one  can 
know. 

2.   The  Nature  of  Reality. 

On  no  point  is  the  diversity  of  Buddhist 
philosophy  so  exemplified  as  on  that  of  its 
various  theories  of  the  nature  of  ultimate  reality. 
There  is,  of  course,  the  marked  line  of  cleavage 


54   INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

between  the  Hinayana  and  Mahay  ana  philoso- 
phies, but,  in  addition,  each  of  these  schools 
is  several  times  subdivided.  The  principal 
stages  may  be  summarized  as  follows  : — 

1.  Primitive  Buddhism^  or  psychological 
agnosticism,  in  which  no  attempt  is  made  to 
explore  the  recesses  of  the  noumenal  world,  and 
no  theories  concerning  ultimate  reality  are 
postulated. 

2.  Hinaydna  Buddhism  teaches  a  material- 
istic realism,  that  the  universe  consists  of  a 
certain  small  number  of  elements,  uncreated, 
which  enter  into  combination  in  accordance 
with  causal  law,  unconnected  with  any  super- 
natural law  giver. 

3.  The  Mddhyamika  School  of  Mahaydna 
broke  up  these  elements  into  component  parts, 
and  stated  that  there  is  only  a  fluid,  fluctuat- 
ing stream  of  life,  and  that  therefore  all  seemingly 
unchanging  phenomena  have  only  a  conceptual 
existence. 

4.  The  Yogdcdrya  School  of  Mahdydna  called 
this  stream  of  life  the  Essence  of  Mind  or  the 
Alaya  Vijnana,  which  is  no  less  fluid  or  devoid  of 
eternal  particularity.  The  evolution  of  this 
Essence  of  Mind  brings  about  the  formation 
of  the  phenomenal  universe. 


THE    NATURE    OF    THE    ABSOLUTE  55 

6.  Chinese  and  Japanese  Mahdyana  (especi- 
ally the  Tendai  and  Kegon  sects)  has  developed 
the  theory  of  the  Absolute  latent  in  the  fore- 
going conceptions,  and  states  that  the  Bhtita- 
tathata  is  both  the  Norm  or  Pure  Form,  or 
Supreme  Idea,  and  also  the  fundamental  essence 
of  all  life. 

This  theory  of  the  Absolute  or  Bhtitatathata 
is  so  important  that  a  few  words  of  elucidation 
are  necessary.  It  is  the  doctrine  which  most 
sharply  distinguishes  Mahayana  from  Hinayana, 
and,  on  the  other  hand,  the  peculiar  line  of 
development  which  the  theory  underwent  causes 
it  to  be  essentially  different  from  most  other 
doctrines  of  the  Absolute  as  found  in  either 
Europe  or  Asia. 

Classification   of  Theories   Concerning  the 

Absolute. 

It  is  important  to  understand  quite  clearly 
just  what  relationship  exists  between  the 
Mahayana  and  other  theories  concerning  the 
nature  of  the  Absolute.  In  attempting  to 
explain  their  own  position,  modern  Mahayana 
scholars  have  classified  the  various  forms  of 
monotheism  In  the  following  way  : — 

1.     Tran$oendental  Monotheism,  under  which 


56    INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

Orthodox  Christianity  and  Islam  are  included. 
In  this  the  Deity  and  the  world  are  entirely 
separate  and  distinct.  Spirit  and  matter  were 
created  by  God  out  of  nothing  and  henceforwards 
exercise  their  functions  in  accordance  with  His 
Laws.  This  school  has  three  divisions,  (a) 
anthropomorphic  in  which  a  definite  form  is 
assigned  to  the  Deity,  (b)  anthropopathic  in 
which  the  Deity  is  without  body  or  parts,  yet  has 
semi-human  emotions,  and  (c)  the  school  in 
which  the  Deity  though  more  or  less  personal 
yet  is  "  without  body  parts,  or  passions." 

2.  Emanational  Monotheism  is  a  modified 
form  of  pantheism  which  teaches  that  God  and 
the  World  are  not  the  same,  yet  the  world  is  of 
a  similar  nature  and  is  an  emanation  from  the 
Deity.  In  this  school  the  Divine  is  the  parent  as 
well  as  the  ruler  of  the  Universe.  This  theory 
which  found  much  favour  with  the  Hindus  and 
the  Sufis,  and  which  has  had  a  revival  amongst 
many  members  of  modern  Liberal  Christianity  is 
usually  associated  with  the  idea  that  the  world 
when  first  emanated  was  pure,  but  that  it  has 
become  corrupted,  though  finally  the  universe 
and  the  human  soul  will  once  more  be  purified, 
whereupon  it  will  be  reabsorbed  into  the  Divine 
Essence. 


THE    NATURE    OF     THE    ABSOLUTE  57 

3.  JDevolutional  Monotheism.  With  the  third 
form  of  monotheism  we  definitely  enter  the 
limits  of  pantheism  strictly  so-called.  In  this 
system  God  and  the  world  are  absolutely  synony- 
mous, one  word  being  used  for  the  other.  There 
are  two  forms  of  this  idea,  one  is  that  the  Divine 
is  simply  the  sum  total  of  the  atoms  which  com- 
pose the  universe,  the  other  which  has  been 
termed  panentheism,  is  that  God  while  the  sum- 
total  is  yet  something  more,  a  something  in 
itself. 

In  either  case  this  school  teaches  that  in  the 
manifestation  of  the  universe  the  Divine  has 
changed  His  essence — that  the  nature  of  the 
Absolute  was  at  first  pure  and  undefiled  like 
clear  water,  but  that  subsequently  it  became 
polluted  as  if  some  mud  were  mingled  with  it 
but  that  at  some  future  time  it  is  to  be  hoped  that 
this  mud  will  be  strained  off  and  the  water  will 
once  more  resume  its  clarity. 

4.  The  Mahay  ana  Conception  stands  in  con- 
tradistinction to  all  the  other  teachings.  To  be 
sure  Mahayana  is,  philosophically  at  least, 
monotheistic,  and  at  the  same  time  it  is  Pantheis- 
tic in  teaching  that  the  divine  and  the  universe 
are  indivisible,  though  with  the  Panentheista 
Mahayana  asserts  that  the  Universal  Buddha  is 


58   INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

far  more  than  the  sum-total  of  existence.  The 
fundamental  difference  is  that  according  to 
Mahayana  the  essence  of  the  Divine  remains  un- 
changed throughout  all  eternity,  and  the  basic 
nature  of  one  phenomenon  is  exactly  the  same 
as  another,  though  the  mode  of  expression  or 
manifestation  may  be  widely  different. 

We  are  given  two  illustrations  of  this  idea. 
The  first  is  that  of  pots  of  clay.  There  are,  we 
know,  pots  of  many  shapes  and  sizes,  some  used 
for  good  purposes  and  some  for  bad,  though  they 
may  all  be  of  the  same  underlying  substance. 
The  other  illustration  is  that  of  the  ocean  which 
we  have  already  pointed  out.  The  pots  and  the 
waves  are  the  different  phenomena  of  the 
universe,  while  the  clay  and  the  ocean  are  the 
Absolute.  While,  to  use  the  simile  of  the  ocean, 
no  two  waves  are  alike,  they  are  all  of  the  same 
essence,  the  water,  and  that  essence  remains 
unchanged,  though  it  is  constantly  assuming 
new  and  different  shapes  and  transformations. 

In  like  manner,  says  Mahayana,  does  the 
Absolute  express  itself  in  the  Universe  without 
in  the  least  affecting  its  own  essence.  The 
Bhfltatathata  therefore  is  the  Eternal  Being  and 
yet  th«  Eternal  Becoming.  Furthermore  ai 
tbare  can  be  an  ocean  without  waves   but   no 


THE    NATURE    OF    THE    ABSOLUTE  59 

waves  without  ocean,  so,  Mahayana  declares,  that 
no  life  would  be  possible  without  having  for  its 
essence   the   Bhutatathata. 

The    Mahayana    Theory    of   the    Nature    of   the 

Absolute. 

A  careful  examination  of  the  Mahayana 
theory  of  the  Bhutatathata  or  Absolute  shews 
that  it  combines  two  widely  different  concepts. 
These  are  (1)  the  norm  of  life,  and  (2)  the  essence 
of  life. 

(1)  On  the  one  hand  it  is  not  the  Universe, 
but  the  sufficient  reason  of  the  Universe,  the 
abstract  idea  of  law  and  causality,  the  such- 
as-it-is-ness  of  life.  It  thus  combines  something 
of  the  Aristotelian  conception  of  the  Pure  Form 
of  the  Universe  as  opposed  to  its  content,  with 
the  Platonic  theory  of  ideas.  In  this  aspect 
it  is  the  symbol  of  intellectual  and  moral  per- 
fection. It  is  for  this  reason  that  we  find  the 
Absolute  described  as  Bharma  (Law),  or  Bhar- 
makdya  (The  Body  of  the  Law),  as  the  Essence 
of  Buddha,  since  it  constitutes  the  reasons  of 
Buddhahood,  Bodhi  (Wisdom)  or  the  source  of 
intelligence,  Prajna  (Enlightenment),  Baramarthd 
(Absolute  Truth),  etc. 

(2)  On  the  other  hand,\in  addition  to  being 


60  INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

the  Norm  or  the  Pure  Form  of  the  Universe, 
it  is  also  its  ultimate  essence.  The  Bhiitatathata 
is  identical  with  the  Essence  of  Mind,  and  so  it 
is  called  the  seed  of  life,  or  the  TathdgatagarbJia 
(the  womb  of  the  Tathagata)  when  it  is  thought 
of  in  analogy  to  Mother  Earth  where  all  the 
germs  of  life  are  stored.  The  Alaya  Vijhana 
is  but  a  development  of  this  aspect  of  the  Bhiita- 
tathata. In  the  early  days  the  word  MahayS.na 
was  used  in  a  similar  connection. 

In  the  famous  Mahayana  ^raddhotpada  ^astra, 
which  is  accepted  as  Orthodox  by  all  branches 
of  Mahayana,  we  find  the  following  general  and 

detailed  explanation  of  the  Buddhist  theory  of 
the  Absolute  : — 

(a).  General  Explanation. 
The  Absolute  can  be  considered  in  two  ways, 
(1)  Its  Substance,  and  (2)  Its  Attributes.  (1) 
Its  Substance.  The  author  of  the  Qraddhotpada 
^astra,  who  is  usually  supposed  to  be  A5vagho§a, 
declares  the  Absolute  to  be  "  the  soul  (or  heart) 
of  all  sentient  beings  and  constitutes  all  things  in 
the  universe,  phenomenal  and  supra-phenome- 
nal." (2)  Its  Attributes.  The  Absolute  has  a 
triple  significance,  (i)  greatness  of  quintessence 
or  essential  nature — an  essence  which  "  knows 
no  diminution  or  addition,  but  remains  the  same 


THE    NATURE    OF    THE     ABSOLUTE  61 

iu  ordinary  people,  ^ravakas,  Pratyeka  Buddha>s, 
Bodhisattvas,  and  Buddhas.  It  was  not  created 
in  the  past,  nor  is  it  to  be  annihilated  in 
the  future  ;  it  is  eternal,  permanent,  absolute  ; 
and  from  all  eternity  it  sufRcingly  embraces  in 
its  essence  all  possible  merits."  (ii)  greatness 
of  manifestations,  "  that  is  to  say  (the  Absolute) 
has  such  characteristics  as  .  .  : — the  effulgence  of 
great  wisdom ;  the  universal  illumination  of 
the  dharmadhatu ;  the  true  and  adequate 
knowledge  ;  the  mind  pure  and  clean  in  its  self 
nature  ;  the  eternal,  the  blessed,  the  self-regulat- 
ing, and  the  pure."  (iii)  greatness  of  activity, 
because  as  a  result  of  its  activity  all  the  innumer- 
able phenomena  of  the  universe  came  into  exist- 
ence, and  also  because  through  its  influence 
aspiring  mankind  feels  a  deep  compassion  for  all 
beings,  "  Bodhisattvas  treat  others  as  their  own 
self  ;  wish  to  work  out  a  universal  salvation  of 
mankind  in  ages  to  come  .  .  .  and  do  not 
cling  to  the  individual  existence  of  a  sentient 
being." 

(h).     Detailed  Explanation. 

The  Absolute  has  two  phases  or  aspects  : — 
(1)  the  Unmanifest  or  Transcendental  phase 
(literally  the  soul  as  Pure  Form)  or  the  Absolute 


62   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

proper,  and  (2)  The  Manifest  or  Immanent  phase 
(hterally  the  soul  as  birth  and  death)  or  the 
Absolute  become  limited. 

(1)  The  Unvianifested  Phase,  is  the  Ideal 
World  the  underlying  unity,  the  quintessence 
of  all  being.  It  is  the  eternal  sameness 
under  all  apparent  difference.  Owing  to  our 
subjective  activity  (nen)  we  build  up  a 
vision  of  a  discrete,  particularized  universe,  but 
in  reality  the  essence  of  things  ever  remains  one, 
void  of  particularity.  Being  absolute  "  it  is 
not  nameable  or  explicable.  It  can  not  be 
rendered  in  any  form  of  language.  It  is  without 
the  range  of  perception."  It  may  be  termed 
^iinya  or  the  Void,  because  it  is  not  a  fixed  or 
limited  entity  but  a  perpetual  becoming,  void  of 
self-existing  component  parts.  It  may  likewise 
be  termed  A^iinya,  the  Full  or  the  Existent 
because  when  confused  subjectivity  has  been 
destroyed  "  we  perceive  the  pure  soul  manifest- 
ing itself  as  eternal,  permanent,  immutable,  and 
completely  comprising  all  things  that  are  pure." 

(2)  The  Manifested  Phase  is  the  Womb  World 
where  are  stored  all  the  potentialities  of  every 
form  of  life.  It  is  identical  with  the  Alaya 
Vijnana,  the  repository  consciousness,  or  the 
Essence   of   Mind.     This   Essence   of   Mind   has 


THE    NATURE    OF    THE    ABSOLUTE  63 

likewise  two  aspects,  (a)  that  of  Enlightenment 
in  which  it  is  regarded  as  the  focus  of  purity  in 
the  phenomenal  world,  (b)  Non -enlightenment 
in  which  the  Alaya  Vijnana  becomes  entangled 
by  ignorance,  and  as  the  result  of  consequent 
confused  subjectivity  gives  rise  to  the  formation 
of  the  phenomenal  world,  which  is,  of  course,  at 
bottom  subjective. 

(a)  Enlightenment  consists  of  supreme 
wisdom  and  purity.  In  one  sense  it  is  latent 
in  all  sentient  beings  however  low  their  state. 
This  is  known  as  Potential  Enlightenment,  or 
enlightenment  a  priori.  The  majority  of  man- 
kind, however,  have  still  to  develop  this  seed  of 
Buddhahood  until  this  enlightenment  be  made 
manifest  and  conscious.  Enlightenment  is  then 
known  as  Active  Enlightenment  or  enlighten- 
ment a  posteriori.  The  various  ranks  such  as 
Common  People,  Qravakas,  Pratyeka  Buddha, 
Bodhisattvas,  and  Buddhas  are  but  stages 
leading  to  Active  Enlightenment. 

(b)  N on- enlightenment  consists  of  the  fecunda- 
tion of  the  Essence  of  Mind  by  Ignorance  which 
results  in  blind  activity  and  the  subsequent 
evolution  of  units  of  consciousness,  which, 
interacting  with  one  another  create  for  themselves 
the  image  of  the  phenomenal  world.     "  There- 


64    INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

fore  the  three  worlds  are  nothing  but  the  mani- 
festation of  the  Alaya  Vijnana — separated  from 
the  mind  there  would  be  no  such  things  as  the 
six  objects  of  sense."  In  order  to  explain  the 
evolution  of  the  phenomenal  world  the  Mahayan- 
ists  have  brought  in  the  Pratitya  Samutpada 
or  the  twelve  Nidanas,  which  in  Hinayana  refer 
almost  exclusively  to  personal  origination,  to 
explain  the  evolution  of  the  external  world. 
First  comes  ignorance,  which,  acting  upon  the 
Absolute,  brings  about  action,  which  results  in 
the  formation  of  consciousness — and  so  on 
through  the  list. 

An  examination  of  the  details  of  this  theory 
lies  outside  the  scope  of  our  present  undertaking, 
but  the  following  points  should  be  of  interest. 
The  Bhutatathata  quickened  by  ignorance  and 
ready  to  be  realized  in  the  world  of  the  particu- 
lars is  known  as  Tathagatagarbha,  literally  the 
Tathagata's  womb,  or  store  house.  It  may 
rightly  be  called  the  womb  of  the  universe 
which  gives  birth  to  the  stream  of  consciousness. 

The  stream  of  life  being  set  flowing,  from  the 
action  arising  therefrom  we  find  the  beginning  of 
the  individualization  of  the  particular  units  of 
latent  consciousness.  Thus  is  the  Alaya  Vijnana 
which  as  Suzuki  says,  "  is  a  particularized  ex- 


THE    NATURE    OF    THE    ABSOLUTE  65 

pression  in  the  human  mind  of  the  Tathagata- 
garbha.  It  is  an  individual,  ideal  reflex  of  the 
cosmic  garbha.  It  is  this  psychic  germ,  as  the 
Alaya  is  often  designated,  that  stores  all  the 
mental  possibilities  which  are  set  in  motion  by 
the  impetus  of  the  external  world." 

The  Alaya  Vijnana  (  Vijndna  means  conscious- 
ness, and  Alaya  repository)  is  not  waking  or 
normal  consciousness.  In  itself  it  is  more  like 
the  unconsciousness  which  is  behind  matter  and 
spirit,  thought  and  extension.  Although  it  is 
individualistic,  or  the  centre  of  blind  activity,  it 
has  not  yet  reached  the  stage  of  self-consciousness, 
or  distinguished  itself  from  other  such  centres. 
It  is  but  the  seed  from  which  the  flower  of 
consciousness  will  blossom,  or  the  material 
out  of  which  the  world  of  subject  and  object 
wUl  be  constructed. 

Gradually,  just  as  the  Unconsciousness  of 
Von  Hartmann  evolves  into  the  Conscious  in 
mankind,  so  does  the  Alaya  Vijndna  evolve  into 
the  Kligtomano-vijnana.  Kligto-mano -vijndna 
is  literally  "  Soiled  Mind  Consciousness "  and 
means  the  state  in  which  the  unit  of  life  begins  to 
be  aware  of  itself,  to  distinguish  itself  from  other 
such  units,  to  become  a  co-ordinated  organism. 

As  this  organism  comes  more  and  more  into 


66   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

contact  with  the  stream  of  life  around  it,  it 
begins  to  react  to  its  external  environment,  to 
distinguish  sensations,  to  group  them  together, 
to  abstract  them  into  ideas  and  to  associate  ideas 
into  memory  and  reason.  Instinctively,  follow- 
ing the  line  of  self-preservation,  it  likes  certain 
sensations  and  dislikes  others,  to  crave  for  the 
pleasant  and  to  avoid  the  unpleasant.  In  this 
way  the  Mano-vijnana  (Mind  consciousness) 
comes  into  being. 

The  external  world  has,  in  its  essence,  a  real 
existence.  It  is  a  part  of  the  stream  of  life 
based  in  the  Essence  of  Mind.  The  world  as  it 
appears,  to  us,  however,  is  the  result  of  action 
of  the  Alaya,  Kli^to-mano,  and  Mano-vijndna, 
stimulated  by  contact  with  the  real  external 
world,  which  in  turn  is  but  a  phase  of  the  uni- 
versal Alaya. 

Sectarian    Views    on    the    Relation    between    the 
Absolute  and  the  World  of  Phenomena. 

The  foregoing  may  be  said  to  represent  the 
views  of  all  branches  of  Mahayana  irrespective 
of  sect.  Most  of  the  schools,  however,  were  very 
fond  of  metaphysical  hair  splitting,  and  it  may 
be  of  interest  to  see  something  of  the  manner 
in  which  they  carried  on  their  discussions.     As 


THE    NATURE    OF    THE    ABSOLUTE  67 

an  instance  let  us  examine,  for  a  moment,  the 
manner  in  which  some  of  the  sects  have  vied 
with  one  another  in  formulating  examples  of  the 
unity  of  life,  and  the  identity  in  essence  of  all 
phenomena. 

The  argument  employed  is  somewhat  compli- 
cated, and  to  understand  it  at  all  it  is  necessary 
to  bear  in  mind  two  things,  one,  the  old  distinction 
between  the  noumenon  and  phenomena  (the 
Samskrita  and  Asamskrita  Dharmas  of  the  older 
Buddhist  phraseology),  the  other,  the  three 
states  of  being,  or  the  three  philosophies  of  life, 
Ke,  Kii,  and  Chu. 

A.  In  China  and  Japan  the  noumenon  or 
the  Essence  of  Mind  is  sometimes  called  Ri  or 
Eeason  or  Principle,  as  opposed  to  phenomena, 
Ji  or  Thing.  These  terms  should  be  remembered 
as  discussions  concerning  the  nature  of  the  Ab- 
solute, the  relationship  between  the  Absolute 
and  the  material  world,  and  the  relation  of  one 
thing  to  another,  were  carried  on  solely  in  these 
terms. 

B.  The  three  states  of  being,  it  will  be  re- 
membered, referred  to  the  metaphysical  stand- 
point of  different  stages  of  Buddhist  develop- 
ment. 

1.     Ke,  stands  for  Eealism,  where  the  various 


68   INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

phenomena  of  the  universe  are  disintegrated  into 
a  number  of  real  and  self-existing  permanent 
elements. 

2.  Ku,  or  Qunya,  has  no  direct  European 
equivalent.  It  is  usually  expressed  by  Nihil- 
istic Idealism,  but  in  reality  it  is  neither  nihilistic 
nor  idealistic.  The  ^iinya  doctrine  simply 
asserts  that  there  is  nothing-unto-itself,  that 
there  is  nothing  changeless  and  eternal,  but  that 
every  thing  is  in  a  state  of  flux,  that  there  is 
never  a  Being  but  only  a  Becoming.  Modern 
European  science  is  nihilistic  in  asserting  that 
there  is  no  changeless  and  self-existing  table, 
as  every  table  is  a  changing  concatenation  of 
elements.  The  Qtinya  doctrine,  as  we  have 
already  observed,  goes  on  to  say  that  these 
elements  are  in  turn  composite,  and  continues  its 
process  of  desintegration  until  we  reach  the 
ceaselessly  flowing  stream  of  life. 

3.  C?iu,  or  Madhya  is  the  ontological  de- 
velopment of  this  stream  of  life.  Madhya  in  its 
metaphysical  aspect  is  equivalent  to  the  Absolute 
or  the  Essence  of  Mind,  the  Bhutatathat§«.  It 
is  the  norm  of  existence  which  is  ever  the  same 
and  yet  ever  changing.  It  is  thus  the  union 
of  opposites.  In  the  light  of  the  Madhya 
doctrine  we  are  able  to  say  that  the  Universe 


THE    NATURE    OF    THE    ABSOLUTE  69 

both  exists  and  non-exists.  The  universe  has 
no  final  existence  per  se,  i.e.,  it  may  be  broken  up 
into  component  parts,  so  that  to  regard  it  as  a 
fixed  reality  is  an  illusion.  On  the  other  hand 
it  has  a  relative  existence.  As  a  complex  it 
does  exist  and  being  derived  from  the  Essence  of 
Mind  its  existence  is  based  upon  ultimate  reality. 
The  Universe  is  but  a  passing  phase  of  the 
Universal  Life  Essence. 

So  much  by  way  of  introduction.  Now  for  the 
discussion  itself.  In  Chinese  or  developed 
Mahayana  we  find  two  main  systems  of  thought, 
one  that  of  the  Avatamsaka  or  Kegon  school, 
which  was  adopted  by  the  Mantra  school,  the 
other  that  of  the  Tendai  school  which  was  taken 
over  by  the  Dhyana  School. 

According  to  the  Avatamsaka  School  the 
teachings  of  its  rival  consists  of  the  Ri-ji-muge 
doctrine  and  its  own  the  Ji-ji-muge  doctrine. 
Let  us  see  exactly  what  this  means. 

Ri-ji-muge  Ji-ji-muge. 


_/f/ 


Ri  it  will  be  remembered  stands   for   reason, 
Principle,    the    Noumenon,    or    the    Absolute  j 


70  INTRODUCTION   10  MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

Ji  for  the  particular,  phenomena,  the  various 
objects  of  the  universe.     Muge  means  undivided. 

Now  in  Mahayana,  as  we  know,  the  Absolute 
or  the  Noumenon  and  the  World  of  Life  and 
Death  or  the  realm  of  phenomena  are  identical. 
Accordingly,  to  use  the  technical  phrase,  the 
Ri  and  the  Ji  are  undivided,  the  greater  including 
the  less.  The  followers  of  this  school  try,  by 
means  of  meditation,  to  unlock  the  secrets  of 
all  phenomena  (Ji)  by  fathoming  the  real  nature 
of  the  one  noumenon  (Ri). 

We  know  moreover,  that  it  is  not  the  case 
only  for  one  phenomenon,  but  that  all  things 
are  one  in  essence  with  the  essence  of  mind. 
In  consequence,  following  out  the  idea  on  logical 
lines,  we  have. 

If  A    =x 
and  B  =i 
then   A  =B. 
Substituting  for  x  the  Ri,  and  for  A  any  pheno- 
menon (Ji  No.  1),  and  for  B  any  other  phenomenon, 
(Ji  No.  2),  we  have 

Ji  No.  1  -Ji  No.  2. 
or    in    other    words,    the   fundamental    essence 
of  any  phenomenon  is  the  same  as    all    other 
such  objects.     In  this  school  of  thought  (the  Ri- 
ji-muge),    however,    one    thing    equals    another 


THE    NATURE    OF    THE    ABSOLUTE  71 

thing  only  indirectly,  i.e.,  only  because  the  two 
things  are  both  identical  with  the  one  transcend- 
ing Ri  and  not  because  of  their  own  essence. 

The  Kegon  School  declares  that  this  doctrine 
is  not  that  of  the  true  immanence  of  the  Uni- 
versal Buddha,  which  is  only  to  be  found  in  the 
theory  of  the  Ji-ji-muge.  Literally,  of  course, 
Ji-ji-muge  means  "  Phenomena-phenomena- 
undivided  "  or  more  freely,  the  direct  identity 
(in  essence)  of  all  phenomena.  This  doctrine 
insists  upon  what  we  may  call  the  a  priori  unity 
of  all  the  material  objects  of  the  universe. 

The  line  of  argument  employed  in  working  out 
this  system  is  the  very  opposite  of  the  preced- 
ing :— 

By  investigating  their  basic  nature  we  discover 
that  one  object  is  of  the  same  substance  with  all 
the  others,  or  let  us  say, 

If  Ji  No.  1  =Ji  No.  2 
And  Ji  No.  2  =Ji  No.  3,  etc., 
then  we  must  postulate  a  universal  noumenon 
which  is  at  the  back  of  them  all. 

In  this  system  phenomena  are  emphasized  at 
the  expense  of  the  noumenon,  or  let  us  say  that 
instead  of  trying  to  understand  the  nature  of  the 
particular  by  comprehending  the  universal,  as  is 
done  in  the  Tendai  School,  we  must  attempt  to 


72  INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

understand  tlic  universal  by  studying  the  par- 
ticular. 

It  can  readily  be  understood  from  this  that 
while  the  Ei-ji-muge  idea  tends  to  make  one  seek 
(he  Buddha  in  the  mind,  the  Ji-ji-muge  concep- 
tion causes  us  to  look  for  the  Universal  Buddha 
in  the  body.  Following  out  the  former  idea  the 
flesh  is  regarded  as  a  shackle  imprisoning  the 
enquiring  spirit,  so  that  by  retiring  from  the 
world  one  should  reduce  it  to  proper  submission 
and  thereby  obtain  enlightenment,  while  with  the 
Ji-ji-muge  School  illumination  can  only  be 
found  through  perfecting  the  flesh  by  bringing 
out  its  latent  potentialities,  and  thereby  un- 
covering the  Buddha  hidden  in  the  human  heart. 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  however,  the  Tendai  and 
the  Kegon  school  have  much  the  same  idea  on 
the  subject,  since  not  only  are  the  two  doctrines 
not  fundamentally  different,  but,  in  addition, 
the  Tendai  school  really  teaches  the  Kegon 
conception  of  the  Ji-ji-muge  under  another  name, 
which  it  calls  Enyu  or  the  doctrine  of  complete 
identity. 

This  introduces  the  question  of  the  three 
states  of  being,  Ku,  Ze,  and  Chii^  and  also  the 
fact  that  later  metaphysicians  like  to  distinguish 
between  the  shallow  Tendai  and  the  profound 


THE    NATURE    OF    THE     ABSOLUTE  73 

Tendai  doctrine.  From  the  fact  that  the  pro- 
found doctrines  developed  in  the  home  of  the 
school  (Mt.  Tendai,  or  T'ient'ai)  it  is  called  the 
Sange  (mt.  home)  doctrine.  The  shallow 
doctrine  developed  in  various  temples  away  from 
the  centre,  so  it  is  called  Sangai  (outside  the 
mountain)  doctrine.  These  names,  sange  and 
sangaif  should  be  noted  for  future  reference. 

Mahayana  scholars  like  to  codify  the  two 
doctrines  regarding  the  nature  of  identity  in  the 
following  way  : — 

I.     The   Shallow   (Sangai)   Doctrine  of 
Identity. 

Abso/ufe  Trufh  /    J1_    \    A/oa/ryenon 

/fe/crffoe  Traf/i    „    /^     „  P/?e/7ome/7ff  ^  TAeJOOO l^cr/c/j 

II.     The   Profound  Doctrine   (Sange)    of 
Identity. 

!/<cy  ■    .  /fi}  > 

/(e  .^^--^^/fe  J 
Another  way  of  presenting  the^same  idea  is  : — 
I.     The  Shallow  Doctrine. 

f A/ourr/enon  j 


"6" 


/ie 
f/^enon7e/y<rJ 


74   INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 


II.     The  Profound  Doctrine. 


Those  who  have  followed  the  line  of  thought 
hitherto  presented  will  not  find  these  graphs 
difficult  to  understand.  In  the  Sangai  school 
Absolute  Truth  is  associated  with  the  principles 
of  Qiinya  (Ku)  and  Madhya  (Chu),  which  in 
turn  represent  the  nomenal  side  of  the  universe 
as  opposed  to  the  phenomena  as  represented  by 
Relative  Truth  and  Illusory  existence  (Ke). 
In  the  Sange  system  all  of  these  various  sets  of 
opposites  are  found  to  be  separate  aspects  of  the 
same  thing. 


CHAPTER    III 

THE     TEIKlYA— THE     BUDDHIST     DOC- 
TRINE     OF     THE     TEINITY 

I.     TTie    Evolution    of    the     Trilcdya    Doctrine. 

The  doctrine  of  the  Trikaya,  the  three  bodies, 
or  the  three  aspects  of  the  Buddha,  is  one  of  the 
most  fascinating  features  of  Mahayana,  and  the 
relationship  that  exists  between  it  and  the 
Trimurti  of  Hinduism,  and  the  Trinity  of 
Christianity,  etc.,  is  of  especial  interest  to  students 
of  comparative  religion. 

Certain  scholars  have  supposed  that  the  triune 
doctrine,  certainly  as  found  in  the  West,  is  the 
result  of  the  idealization  of  the  human  family  of 
Father  {e.g.,  the  Egyptian  Osiris),  Mother  {e.g., 
Isis),  and  Son  {e.g.,  Horus).  Certainly  as  far  as 
Buddhism  is  concerned,  this  supposition  proves 
fallacious,  for  the  present  doctrine  of  the  Trikaya 
is  the  result  of  a  long  and  intricate  line  of 
doctrinal  evolution. 

Needless  to  say,  in  Hinayana  the  doctrine  is 
entirely  extraneous,  though,  as  with  other  points, 
careful  study  shews  that  it  contains  the  rudi- 

F 


/.Z' 


76   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

ments  of  eacli  of  the  Kaya  or  bodies  individually, 
though  naturally  in  an  entirely  undeveloped 
form. 

The  Trikaya  are  :  — 

1.  DharmaJcdya,   or   the   Body   of   the   Law, 

practically  synonymous  with 
the  Bhutatathata. 

2.  SambhogaMya,  or  Body  of  Compensation. 

The  symbol  of  the  Buddha 
ideal. 

3.  NirmUnakdya,  or  Body  of  Transformation, 

the  Universal  Manifested  in 
the  World. 
1.     Nirmdnakdya. 

The  Nirmanakaya  is  of  course,  ^akyamuni, 
and  the  other  human  Buddhas,  having  aU  the 
qualities  of  mortals,  subject  to  disease,  old  age, 
and  death.  (Hence  the  name  Transformation). 
Being,  however,  the  voice  of  the  Universal 
Buddha  they  are  one  with  it.  The  Mrmanakaya 
might  be  more  freely  rendered  as  the  Body  of 
Incarnation. 

Gradually,  if  we  trace  the  history  of  the 
evolution  of  the  Buddha  legend,  the  human 
Buddhas  came  to  be  glorified  and  elevated  far 
beyond  the  possibilities  of  corporal  persons. 
They  are  possessed  of  the  thirty-two  major  and 


THE    TRIKAYA  77 

eighty  minor  physical  marks  of  excellence. 
They  are  endowed  with  the  supermundane  powers 
of  clairvoyance,  clairaudience,  increase  and  de- 
crease of  stature,  etc.  They  have  power  over 
the  whole  universe,  and  over  all  sentient  beings. 
They  are  the  quintessence  of  holiness,  wisdom, 
purity,  mercy,  and  all  other  ideal  qualities. 

This  process  is  visible  in  Hinayana,  as  well  as 
in  Mahayana,  but  it  is  not  carried  to  the  same 
extreme.  Furthermore,  the  Hinayanists  have 
tried  to  keep  more  or  less  within  the  bounds  of 
possibility,  and  all  the  marvels  recorded  refer 
to  the  human  Buddha.  In  Mahayana,  however, 
the  limits  of  a  single  personality  were  trans- 
cended, and  believers  soon  began  to  expend 
lavish  poetical  adornment  upon  the  ideal  of  the 
Buddha.  He  is  attended  by  myriads  of  Devas 
and  Bodhisattvas.  He  sits  for  long  kalpas  in 
meditation.  His  death  is  only  an  illusion,  an 
wpdya,  and  in  reality  he  is  ever  alive  helping 
on  the  progress  of  the  world. 

2.     Sambhogakdya. 

The  Buddha  of  the  Mahayana  Siitras,  then,  is 
an  idealized  Buddha,  and  has  the  same  relation 
to  the  historical  Buddha  as  the  Christ,  or  the 
Logos  to  the  historical  Jesus,  or  perhaps  to  the 
glorified  Christ  of  the  resurrection.     It  is  this 


78    INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

aspect  of  the  Buddha  which  is  known    as    the 
Sambhogakaya. 

Strangely  enough,  the  Occidental  idea  which 
comes  nearest  to  the  Buddhist  doctrine  of  the 
Sambhogakaya,  is  Mr.  Well's  theory  of  God  the 
Invisible  King.  Wells  contrasts  the  God  behind 
the  Veil,  the  God  of  Abstract  Justice,  with  the 
conception  of  God  as  the  Ideal,  as  the  object  of 
devotion,  as  the  symbol  of  the  Christ  spirit.  The 
God  behind  the  Veil  is  the  Bhtitatathata,  or  the 
Dharmakaya,  and  the  Invisible  King  is  the 
Sambhogakaya,  the  Body  of  Glory,  the  Buddha 
Spirit  behind  all  human  Buddhas. 
i  The  Buddha  of  most  of  the  Mahayana  Siitras 
is  this  Sambhogakaya,  who  merely  uses  the 
Nirmanakaya  as  his  mouth -piece,  and  though  he 
is  one  with  all  the  Buddhas,  and  not  merely 
Qakyamuni,  he  is  often  called  by  this  name. 
Thus  for  exami)le,  the  Saddharma  Pundarika 
Sutra  speaks  of  the  Buddha  as  being  the  loving 
father  who  rescues  his  children  (all  sentient 
beings)  from  the  burning  house  of  the  three 
worlds.  For  this  reason  do  the  innumerable 
Bodhisattvas  appear  to  testify  to  the  fact  that 
all  through  eternity  the  Buddhas  have  at  various 
times  appeared  to  teach  all  mankind  the  Law. 

"  Every  drop  of  water  in  the  vast  ocean  can 


THE    TBI  KAY  A  79 

be  counted,  but  the  age  of  ^akyamuni  iioue  can 
measure  :  crush  Mt.  Sumeru  into  particles  as 
fine  as  mustard  seed  and  we  can  count  them,  but 
the  age  of  ^akyamuni  none  can  measure  .  .  . 
the  Buddha  never  entered  into  Parinirvana, 
the  Good  Law  will  never  perish.  He  shewed  an 
earthly  death  merely  for  the  benefit  of  sentient 
beings." 

The  meaning  of  all  this  is  obvious.  Mahayana 
does  not  deny  the  earthly  career  of  Qakyamuni 
lasting  for  some  eighty  odd  years,  and  subject 
to  the  usual  frailties  of  human  existence,  but 
teaches  that  the  latter  was  only  the  Nirmanakaya, 
the  Body  of  Transformation,  behind  which  was 
the  eternal  Sambhogakaya,  or  the  Body  of 
Glory. 

3.     Dharmakdya. 

While  then  the  Nirmanakaya  is  the  human 
Buddha,  and  the  Sambhogakaya  the  glorified 
Buddha  ideal,  the  Dharmakaya  is  the  essence 
of  Buddhahood,  the  norm  of  existence,  and  ig 
therefore  synonymous  with  the  Bhtitatathata  of 
which  it  is  but  a  devotional  symbol. 

The  idea  of  the  Dharmakaya  probably  origin- 
ated in  the  fact  that  shortly  before  his  death 
^akyamuni  is  supposed  to  have  told  his  disciples 


80  INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

that  though  after  his  decease  no  longer  person- 
ally would  he  be  with  them,  yet  (metaphorically 
speaking)  he,  like  all  other  Buddhas,  would 
continue  to  exist  in  the  Law  of  Dharma.  Now 
in  the  first  place,  by  "  existing  in  the  Law  "  he 
may  have  meant  merely  existing  in  the  doctrine 
Avhich  he  taught,  but  to  quote  Suzuki,  "  Dharma 
is  a  very  pregnant  word,  and  covers  a  wide  range 
of  meaning.  It  comes  from  the  root  dhr,  which 
means  to  hold,  to  carry,  to  bear,  and  the  primitive 
sense  of  dharma  is  that  which  carries,  supports, 
or  bears.  Then  it  came  to  signify  that  which 
forms  the  norm  or  regulates  the  course  of  things, 
i.e.  the  Law,  institution,  rule,  doctrine  .  .  . 
essential  quality,  substance,  that  which  exists 
in  reality,  being." 

Accordingly,  though  originally  the  spirit  of  the 
Buddha  may  have  been  synonymous  with  the 
doctrines  of  the  Buddha  it  was  not  long  before  it 
became  synonymous  with  the  root  of  life,  the 
essence  of  being,  the  norm  of  the  universe. 
In  a  word,  then,  comparing  the  Trikaya  with 
Western  ideas  we  may  say  that  Bhiitatathata 
stands  for  the  Essence  of  Godhood,  the  ultimate 
and  unmanifested  Deity,  the  Dharmakaya  to 
the  norm  of  the  manifest  world,  the  Christian 
God  the  Father,  the  Sambhogakaya  to  a  com- 


THE    TRIKAYA  81 

pound  of  the  Logos,  the  Resurrected  Christ,  and 
Well's  Invisible  King,  and  the  Mrmanakaya  to 
the  incarnation  of  the  divine. 

II.     The    Three   Bodies   in   Detail. 

Later  Mahayana  scholars  considerably 
amplified  these  ideas  and  subdivided  each  kaya. 
In  the  Orthodox  Tendai  system  the  arrange- 
ment of  the  Trikaya  is  as  follows  : — 

1.  Dharmakdya Eeason 

2.  SamhhogaMya        . .      ....         Wisdom 

a.  Body  of   self  enjoyment 

b.  Body  for  the  enjoyment 

of  others. 

3.  NirmdnaMya Love 

a.  Ojin — complete  incarnation 

i.  superior  sho-ojin 
ii.  inferior  reff ojin 

b.  Keshin — ^incomplete  incarnation 

1.  The  Dharmakdya. 
In  this  arrangement  the  Dharmakaya  is  the 
Heart  of  Life  devotionally  considered.  It  is 
the  co-ordinating  principle  of  existence,  the  acme 
of  perfection,  the  fountain  head  of  intelligence. 
All  the  other  aspects  or  kaya  are  included  in  it, 
but  in  itself  it  is  primarily  the  personification  of 


82  INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

Reason  or  Intelligence.  It  is,  par  excellence,  the 
Universal  Buddha  symbolized  in  various  ways 
and  under  diverse  names,  and  as  such  is  the 
background  of  all  the  Buddhas,  and  even  of  the 
glorified  Buddha-ideal,  the  Sambhogakaya.  All 
sentient  beings  find  their  raison  d^etre  in  the 
Dharmakaya  and  are  based  on  the  fundamental 
nature  of  its  essence.  It  has  been  the  object  of 
adoration,  and  in  the  religious  literature  of 
Mahayana  we  find  numberless  passages  devoted 
to  its  praise. 

According  to  certain  schools  the  Dharmakaya 
is  divided  into  two  aspects.  One  is  the  Hosshd 
HossMn  (The  Dharma  nature  Dharma  body )  which 
is  the  Dharmakaya  in  its  normative  and  abstract 
sense.  This  is,  to  quote  Lloyd,  "  the  spiritual 
Body  of  the  Buddha  as  he  is  which  is  still  con- 
sidered as  an  integral  part  of  the  Shinnyo  Hosshd 
(Bhtitatathata).  This  is  formless  and  incapable 
of  description,  and  answers  more  or  less  exactly 
to  God  as  he  is  hinted  at  rather  than  described  in 
certain  passages  in  the  Old  Testament.  But  it 
is  impossible  for  men  with  their  finite  thoughts 
and  still  more  finite  language  to  speak  of  God 
except  under  some  form  with  which  they  are 
themselves  familiar.  Hence  we  get  in  the  Old 
Testament  the  anthropomorphic  language  about 


THE    TRIM  AY  A  83 

God,  His  holy  arm,  His  feet,  etc.  Such  language 
the  Japanese  would  call  hdben  (upaya)  an 
accommodation  of  the  truth  to  the  capacity  of 
the  hearer  and  Buddhist  Theology  speaks  not 
only  of  Hossho  Hosshin  which  it  is  beyond  the 
power  of  man  to  describe  but  also  of  Edben 
Hosshin  a  spiritual  body  of  God  accomodated 
to  the  capacity  of  man,  and  spoken  of  under  a 
human  shape."  ** 

This  Hoben  Hosshin  or  second  aspect  of  the 
Dharmakaya  is  nothing  but  the  personification 
or  symbolization  of  the  idea  of  the  supreme  ideal 
inherent  in  the  Shinnyo  Hossho  (Bhiitatathata) 
and  the  Hossho  Hosshin.  But  it  has  an  objective 
as  well  as  a  subjective  existence.  Just  as  the 
waking  consciousness,  the  Mano-Vijndna 
gradually  evolves  from  the  KUgto-mano  and  the 
Alaya  Vijndna  so  does  the  essence  of  Buddha- 
hood  gradually  manifest  or  crystallize  itself 
from  the  Hossho  Hosshin  and  the  Shinnyo 
Hossho.  The  latter  two  are  essentially  self 
existing  principles,  the  former  an  active  ideal 
revealing  itself  to  the  world  in  many  guises 
suitable  to  the  needs  of  the  times. 

A  passage  from  the  Suvarna  Prabhasa  on  the 
nature  of  the  Trikaya  gives  some  idea  of  the 
relationship  between  the  Dharmakaya,  and  the 

♦•A.  Lloyd.    Shinran  and  His  Work. 


84   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

other  two  Kaya  or  Bodies  : — 

"  The  Tathagata  when  he  was  yet  at  the  stage 
of  discipline  practised  divers  deeds  of  morality 
for  the  sake  of  sentient  beings.  (Through  this 
practice)  he  finally  attained  perfection,  reached 
maturity  and  by  virtue  of  its  merits  he  acquired 
a  wonderful  spiritual  power.  He  revealed  him- 
self in  the  right  place  assuming  various  bodily 
forms.  These  bodily  forms  are  called  the 
Nirmanakaya  of  the  Tathagata. 

"  But  when  the  Tathagatas,  in  order  to  make 
the  Bodhisattvas  thoroughly  conversant  with 
the  Dharma  .  .  .  manifest  themselves  to 
the  Bodhisattvas  in  a  form  which  is  perfect  with 
the  thirty-two  major  and  eighty  minor  features 
of  excellence  and  shining  with  the  halo  around 
the  head  and  back,  the  Tathagatas  are  said  to 
have  assumed  the  Body  of  Bliss  or  Sambhogakaya. 

"  When  all  possible  obstacles  arising  from  sins 
are  perfectly  removed,  and  when  all  possible 
good  dharmas  are  preserved  there  would  remain 
nothing  but  Suchness  (the  Bhutatathata) — this 
is  the  Dharmakaya.  The  first  two  forms  of  the 
Tathagatas  are  provisional  (and  ephemeral  exist- 
ences) but  the  last  one  is  a  reality,  wherein  the 
former  two  find  the  reason  of  their  existence."  ** 

*♦  Trans,  by  Suzuki,  Outlinesjp.  256, 


THE    TRIKA  YA  85 

2.     The  Sambhogakdya. 

There  is  little  distinction  between  the  Hobcn 
Hosshin  or  the  personalized  Dharmakaya  and 
the  Hoshin  or  the  Sambhogakaya.  At  the  most 
the  Sambhogakaya  is  a  still  further  personaliza- 
tion, an  attempt  to  make  the  Universal  more 
vivid  and  intimate. 

We  see  from  this  that  the  Sambhogakaya  is  an 
embodiment  of  the  Buddha  ideal,  a  permanent 
ideal  which  is  not  affected  by  the  passing  away 
of  any  human  Buddhas  which  are  but  fleshly 
counterparts  of  the  quintessence  of  perfection. 
It  is  in  this  sense  that  we  have  compared  it  to 
Well's  Invisible  King.  The  relationship  between 
the  two  may  be  seen  from  the  following  passages : — 

"  The  writer  believes  that  the  centuries  of 
fluid  religious  thought  that  preceded  the  violent 
ultimate  crystallization  of  Nicea  was  essentially 
a  struggle  .  .  to  reconcile  .  .  two  separ- 
ate main  series  of  God-ideas  .  .  .  These 
two  antagonistic  typical  conceptions  of  God  may 
be  best  contrasted  by  speaking  of  them  as  God- 
as-nature  or  the  Creator,  and  of  the  other  as 
God-as-Christ  or  the  Eedeemer.  One  is  the 
Outward  God  ;  the  other  is  the  Inmost  God* 
The  writer's  position  .  .  is,  firstly,  complete 
ganosticism  in  the  matter  of  God  the  Creator,  and 


86  INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

entire  faith  in  God  the  Redeemer  .  .  .  God 
presents  Himself  as  finite,  as  struggling  against 
and  taking  a  part  against  evil.  .  .  .  He  will 
assert  that  his  God  is  a  god  of  salvation,  that  he  is 
a  spirit  and  a  person,  a  strongly  marked  and 
knowable  personality,  knowing,  loving,  inspir- 
ing, and  lovable,  who  exists  or  strives  to  exist 
in  every  human  soul." 

In  Wells  we  find  a  strong  antagonism  between 
the  Infinite  God  and  the  Redeemer  God.  Mahay- 
ana  recognizes  the  difference,  but  asserts  that 
their  counterparts,  the  Dharmakaya  and  the 
Sambhogakaya  are  but  different  aspects  of  the 
same  reality. 

Nor  must  the  other  aspect  of  Sambhogakaya 
be  forgotten — ^it  corresponds  to  the  Christian 
conception  of  the  resurrected  Christ.  This  view 
has  been  voiced  by  Arthur  Lloyd  in  the  following 
words  : — 

"  The  Body  of  compensation  is  the  body  in 
which  Amida  Butsu  (the  universal  Buddha)  the 
glorified  Saviour  who  has  worked  out  man's 
salvation  is  now  set  forth  as  the  personal  object 
of  worship  for  the  believer.  It  is,  as  it  were,  the 
counterpart  of  that  glorified  humanity  in  which 
we  believe  that  our  Risen  Saviour  Jesus  Christ, 
having  passed  into  the  Heavens,  is  sitting  in  his 


THE    TRIKAYA  87 

meditorial  kingdom  '  at  the  right  hand  of  God.'  " 
This  perhaps  helps  us  to  understand  two  points, 
first  the  name  of  the  Body,  for  it  is  the  Body  of 
Compensation  or  the  glorious  reward  of  the  long 
ages  of  self-sacrifice  for  the  benefit  of  sentient 
beings,  and  second  the  two-fold  division  of  the 
Sarabhogakaya.     These  are  : — 

1.  The  Ji-jiyu-hoshin,  or  the  body  of  self- 

enjoyment. 

2.  The  Ta-jiyu-hoshin,  or  Body  for  the  En- 

joyment of  Others. 
The  first  is  the  Body  of  Compensation  proper, 
that  which  each  Buddha  has  gained  by  dint  of 
his  religious  discipline  through  the  long  ages  of 
the  past.  It  is  the  recipient  of  ceaseless  devotion 
which  is  constantly  being  offered  by  worshippers. 
It  may  therefore  be  called  the  immediate  object 
of  worship,  for  when  one  wishes  to  worship  the 
divine  in  any  aspect,  the  devotion  is  received  by 
the  Body  of  Bliss. 

The  second,  or  Ta-jiyti-hoshin,  on  the  other 
hand,  is  supposed  to  be  that  aspect  of  divinity 
which  is  constantly  shedding  its  illumination 
over  all  the  world.  These  spiritual  rays  are 
thought  to  be  for  the  benefit  of  all  men  imparti- 
ally, the  sinner  as  well  as  the  saint,  the  ignorant 
as   well   as   the   wise.     It  is   obvious,   however, 


88    INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

that  it  is  the  spiiitually  minded  who  benefit  the 
most  by  them,  since  it  is  the  latter  who  are 
the  most  conscious  of  them  and  are  the  most 
willing  to  profit  thereby. 

This  Ta-jiyu-hoshin  has  many  ways  of  re- 
vealing itself  to  man,  but  one  especially  in  which 
it  assumes  an  apparitional  body  in  the  various 
Sukhavatis  or  Paradises  for  the  instruction  of  the 
Bodhisattvas.  Descriptions  of  this  body  are 
to  be  found  in  many  devotional  scriptures,  e.g., 
the  Amitayus-Sutropadesa. 

One  point  deserves  especial  attention.  Every 
Buddha  is  supposed  to  possess  this  Sambhogakaya 
and  yet  each  Sambhogakaya  is  considered 
infinite  in  space  and  time,  co-extensive  with  the 
universe.  It  is  obvious  that  in  order  to  prevent 
the  theory  of  innumerable  eternals  and  omni- 
presents,  Mahayana  was  forced  to  state  that  in 
reality  there  was  but  one  great  Sambhogakaya 
of  which  those  of  individual  Buddhas  are  but 
different  aspects.  The  same  thing,  of  course, 
holds  true  with  regard  to  the  Sukhavatis.  The 
view  held  by  most  philosophic  Mahayanists  is 
expressed  by  Suzuki  when  he  says  : — 

"  The  reader  must  not  think  that  there  is  but 
one  Pure  land  which  is  elaborately  described  in 
the  Sukhavati-Vytiha  Siitra  as  the  abode  of  the 


THE    TRIKAYA  89 

Amitabha,  situated  innumerable  leagues  away 
in  the  West.  On  the  contrary,  the  Mahayana 
texts  admit  the  existence  of  as  innumerable  Pure 
Lands  as  there  are  Tathagatas  and  Bodhisattvas, 
and  every  single  one  of  these  holy  regions  has  no 
boundary  and  is  co -existent  with  the  universe 
.  .  .  It  would  look  to  every  intelligent  mind 
that  those  innumerable  Buddha  countries  exist- 
ing in  such  a  mysterious  and  incomprehensible 
manner  cannot  be  anything  else  than  our  own 
subjective   creation."  ** 

3.  The  NirmdnaJcdya. 
Though  the  Sambhogakaya  provides  for  the 
enlightenment  of  Bodhisattvas  and  earnest  as- 
pirants after  Truth,  a  still  more  concrete  and 
material  expression  of  the  Absolute  is  required  for 
the  masses  who  still  slumber  in  ignorance.  This 
the  Mahayanists  find  in  the  Nirmanakaya  or  the 
physical  bodies  of  the  human  Buddhas,  who  by 
their  example  and  instruction  lead  men  to  the 
Path  of  Light. 

Mahayana  looks  upon  the  Buddhas  as  both 
divine  and  human.  They  are  human  in  that 
they  are  persons  who  have  gained  their  positions 
as  the  result  of  a  long  period  of  spiritual  develop- 
ment.    Potentially  they  are  of  the  same  nature 

**  Suz.  Outlines  p.  269. 


90   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

as  ourselves,  since  we  too  have  the  Buddha 
nature  within  us  and  every  one  of  us  shall  at 
some  future  time  attain  to  the  supreme  goal. 
They  are  divine,  however,  in  as  much  as  in  them 
the  Buddha  seed  has  come  to  fruition.  They  are 
not  only  potentially  but  actually  one  with  the 
Dharmakaya  and  Sambhogakaya.  Their  advent 
to  earth  is  merely  to  make  manifest  the  wisdom 
and  perfection  of  the  absolute. 

Later  Mahay  ana  goes  more  into  detail.  The 
Nirmanakaya  is  of  two  classes,  which  are  called 
(in  Japanese)  the  Ojin  and  Keshin,  which  may 
somewhat  inadequately  be  called  the  Complete 
and  Incomplete  Incarnations.  The  Ojin  is 
divine  a  priori,  the  Keshin  is  divine  a  posteriori. 
The  Ojin  is  identical  in  essence  with  the  Samb- 
hogakaya, no  distinction  can  be  made  between 
the  two  ;  the  Keshin  is  merely  a  man  in  whom 
the  spirit  of  the  universal  Buddha  dwells,  in- 
spiring his  teaching  and  elevating  his  personality. 
The  latter  is  frequent  and  universal,  whereas  the 
only  two  examples  of  the  Ojin  in  recent  times  are 
Qakyamuni,  and  the  Buddhist  Messiah,  Maitreya 
(Miroku)  whose  advent  Cakyamuni  prophesied. 

The  Ojin  has  again  two  bodies  or  aspects,  the 
superior  or  Sho-djin  and  the  inferior  or  Rettdjin. 
The   Bodhisattvas    are    suflQciently    enlightened 


THE    TRIKAYA  91 

to  be  able  to  receive  their  instruction  directly 
from  the  Sambhogakaya,  while  the  Sho-ojin  is 
for  Pratyeka  Buddhas,  those  who  aim  at  en- 
lightenment for  themselves  alone,  selfish  yet 
capable  of  deep  theoretical  understanding, 
while  the  Eettojin  or  Inferior  Body  is  for  the 
purpose  of  instructing  the  Qravakas,  those  who 
merely  aim  at  freedom  from  the  wheel  of  life  and 
death. 

According  to  Mahayana  the  doctrines  of 
Hinayana  were  revealed  by  the  Eettojin  (the 
inferior  aspect)  while  its  own  system  was  taught 
by  the  Sho-ojin,  though  many  schools  of  Mahay- 
ana  prefer  to  state  that  the  deeper  aspects  were 
taught  by  the  Universal  Buddha  directly,  which, 
however,  we  know  was  the  same  as  Qakyamuni 
in  his  highest  Samadhi. 

III.  Sectarian  Views  on  the  TriTcaya. 
So  far  the  theory  of  Trikaya  has  been  in  accord 
with  the  teachings  of  all  the  various  schools  of 
Mahayana.  As  on  other  points,  however,  later 
discussion  gave  rise  to  certain  points  of  doctrinal 
differentiation,  chiefly  concerning  the  mutual 
relationship  of  the  Three  Bodies  and  their 
connection  with  the  world  as  a  whole.  These 
we   may   classify   under   the   teachings   of   the 


92   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

Kegon  school,  and  the  Tendai  school,  the  last 
being  again  divided  into  the  shallow  (sangai) 
and  the  profound  (sang^)  doctrine. 

1.     The   Kegon   and    Teyidai   Doctrines. 
The  difference  between  the  Kegon  and  Tendai 
schools    of   Mahayana   is   usually    expressed   in 
the  following  manner  : — 

The  Kegon  Doctrine. 


/%e, 


'nomena 


The  Tendai  Doctrine. 

A/a/jmenar?  /  Dharma/fai/a 

\  A//r/77ana /fat/a 

In  the  Kegon  school  the  Dharmakaya  alone 
is  the  Noumenon  {Ri)  and  the  other  two  bodies 
belong  to  the  Ji  or  world  of  phenomena,  though, 
since  the  noumenon  and  phenomena  are  united, 
the  three  Bodies  are  likewise  indirectly  united. 
In  the  Tendai  school,  on  the  other  hand,  they  are 
directly  identical. 


THE    TRIKAYA 


93 


As  a  matter  of  fact,  since  the  Kegon  school 
teaches  the  doctrine  of  the  Jijimuge  (vide  page 
69  supra),  the  doctrines  of  the  two  sects  are 
not  very  different. 

2.     The   Sangai   and    Sange   Doctrines. 
Coming  now  to  the  two  schools  of  the  Tendai 
order,  the  Sange  and  the  Sangai,  we  find  that 
their  relationship   has   been   expressed   thus  : — 


The  Sangai  Doctrine. 


So^^/^oc^a/fai/a 


A//r/r?a/7a/rc/i/a 


The   Sange   Doctrine. 


Sa/T?b/?o^a/rai/a 


/\/jr/rfa/7a/f6/, 


'C/£T 


The  Sangai  or  less  developed  doctrine  teaches 
the  separation  and  independence  of  the  Trikaya. 


94   INTRODUCTION    TO    MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

Since  all  things  are  ultimately  derived  from  the 
Dharmakaya,  both  the  Sambhogakaya  and  the 
Nirmanakaya  are  in  reality  one  in  essence  with 
it,  and  hence  indirectly  united  one  with  another, 
but  from  the  phenomenal  point  of  view  their 
functions  and  attributes  are  different.  They  are 
in  a  word  separate  entities  with  a  common  basis 
rather  than  one  entity  with  three  phases.  The 
Sangai  doctrine  is  perhaps  comparable  to  the 
Christian  doctrine  of  the  Trinity  "  three  persons 
but  one  God." 

The  Sang6  doctrine  teaches  that  in  reality 
the  three  Kayas  are  absolutely  identical,  aie  but 
three  ways  in  which  the  Absolute  reveals  itself 
to  the  world,  or  even  but  three  ways  of  regarding 
the  Absolute.  In  certain  respects  the  Sang6 
doctrine  approximates  the  Sabellian  heresy  in 
Christianity,  which  of  course  held  that  there  is 
but  one  god  with  three  aspects  rather  than  one 
God  with  three  persons. 

3.     The  Shodomon  and  Jodomon  Doctrines. 

The  slight  distinction  which  exists  between  the 
Shodomon  (Arya-marga-dvara)  and  Jodomon 
(Sukhavati-dvara)  concerning  the  Trikaya 
should  also  be  noticed.  Roughly  speaking  the 
Shodomon  consists  of  the  older  and  philosophic 


THE    TRIKAYA  95 

sects,  and  is  the  unreformed  section  of  Mahayana. 
The  Jodomon  consists  of  those  who  seek  enligh- 
tenment through  the  grace  of  Amitabha,  and 
since  the  most  powerful  branch  of  this  school, 
the  Shin  sect,  has  considerably  modified  the  older 
rules  of  organisation,  the  Jodomon  is  usually 
known  as  the  reformed  branch  of  Mahayana. 
The  Shodomon  includes  the  Kegon  (Avatarasaka), 
the  Tendai,  the  Mantra  (Shingon),  the  Dhyana 
(Zen),  and  the  Nichiren  sects,  with  other 
similar  schools  in  China.  The  Jodomon  is 
divided  into  the  Jodo  or  Sukhavati  sect  proper, 
and  the  Shin  or  True  Sect,  The  Shodomon 
seeks  Buddhahood  by  being  reborn  upon  earth 
until  perfection  be  gained,  the  Jodomon  hopes  to 
attain  the  supreme  goal  by  means  of  being  re- 
born into  the  Sukhavati  or  Land  of  Bliss,  through 
the  great  love  of  the  Universal  Buddha.  The 
Shodomon  is  based  upon  reason,  the  Jodomon 
upon  wisdom,  faith,  and  mercy. 

It  is  but  natural  therefore,  that  the  Shodomon 
should  lay  especial  emphasis  upon  the  reason 
side  of  the  Absolute,  which  is,  as  we  know,  the 
Dharmakaya,  while  the  Jodomon  gives  especial 
deference  to  the  Sambhogakaya  which  is  the 
wisdom  or  mercy  aspect.  While  theoretically 
the  two  schools  do  not  differ  in  their  interpreta- 


95   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

tion  of  the  two  bodies,  the  fact  that  the  object 
of  especial  worship  in  one  is  the  Dharmakaya, 
in  the  other  the  Sambhogakaya  has  necessarily 
resulted  in  somewhat  different  theological 
attitudes,  so  much  so  in  fact  that  in  Shodomon, 
the  Dharmakaya  almost  corresponds  to  the 
Christian  God  the  Father,  and  the  Sambhogakaya 
to  the  Holy  Ghost,  while  in  the  Jodomon  the 
roles  are  exactly  opposite. 

One  last  word  about  the  Trikaya  must  be 
added.  In  the  earlier  sects  of  Mahayana,  such 
as  the  Avatamsaka  and  the  Tendai  schools,  the 
Trikaya  was  a  purely  philosophic  conception 
unconcerned  with  the  devotional  life.  In  the 
slightly  later  Mantra  sect,  however,  the  three 
bodies  were  personified  or  symbolized  and 
given  the  names  of  ideal  Buddhas.  The  Dhar- 
makaya was  known  as  Vairocana  (Dainichi 
Nyorai)  the  Sambhogakaya  as  Amitabha  (Amida) 
while  the  Nirmanakaya  was  personified  by 
Qakyamuni.  The  Mantra  (Shingon)  sect  be- 
longs to  the  Shodomon,  so  that  Vairocana  is 
the  chief  object  of  worship,  but  in  the  Sukhavati 
or  Jodo  school  where  the  Sambhogakaya  is  the 
object  of  worship  it  is  Amitabha  who  is  exclusively 
adored.  In  this  school,  however,  Amitabha  is 
not   merely   the  Sambhogakaya  but   the  other 


THE    TRIM  AY  A  97 

two  bodies  as  well,  so  that  except  for  Amit- 
abha's  two  manifestations  Avalokitegvara 
(Kannon)  and  Mahasamprapta  (Daiseishi),  the 
symbols  of  Love  and  Wisdom  respectively,  the 
worship  of  other  beings  is  either  prohibited  or 
deprecated. 

This  may  be  said  to  represent  the  final  stage 
in  the  development  of  the  Trikaya  doctrine 
proper,  but  this  in  turn  led  to  still  further 
doctrinal  formulation.  The  three  bodies  of 
the  Universal  Buddha  were  regarded  as  Upaya 
(hoben)  accommodation  of  truth,  three  ways  of 
regarding  an  indivisible  unity.  Such  being  the 
case,  it  is  obvious  that  there  is  no  inherent  reason 
why  this  three-fold  division  of  the  functions  of 
the  Absolute  should  be  the  only  one.  Should 
circumstances  render  it  advisable  the  Absolute 
could  be  symbolized  in  fifty,  a  hundred,  or  a 
thousand  ways. 

Under  these  circumstances  the  multiplicity 
of  the  representatives  of  the  Universal  Buddha 
should  cause  no  surprise.  On  the  contrary  it 
is  remarkable  that  they  are  not  more  numerous, 
and  more  inconsistent,  for  in  Chinese  and  Japan- 
ese Buddhism  practically  all  the  important 
symbolizations  of  the  Absolute  may  be  classified 
under  the  ten  bodies  of  the  Avatamsaka  sect, 


98  INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

and  the  Buddhas  and  Bodhisattvas  of  the  two 
mandalas  of  the  Mantra  sect.  Into  these, 
however,  the  limits  of  time  and  space  prevent 
our  going. 


CHAPTEE    IV 

THE    NATUEE    AND    POWEES    OF 
BUDDHAHOOD 

I.  The  Roads  to  Buddhahood 
^akyamuni  is  supposed  to  have  said,  "  Only- 
one  doctrine  do  I  preach  : — suffering  and  the 
cessation  of  suffering."  Certainly  the  whole 
essence  of  Buddhism  is  bound  up  in  those  words. 
AU  sentient  beings  led  astray  by  ignorance  and 
desire  undergo  perpetual  birth  and  rebirth  in 
one  or  another  of  the  six  realms  of, 

1.  The  ISTarakas  or  Hells. 

2.  The  Preta  Eealm. 

3.  The  Animal  Eealm. 

4.  The  Asura  Eealm. 

5.  The  Human  Eealm. 

6.  The   Heavens. 

In  all  of  these  worlds  there  is  more  or  less 
pleasure  or  pain,  but  in  none  of  them  is  there 
supreme  bliss  or  perfect  enlightenment.  Dura- 
tion of  bliss  in  these  worlds  varies,  but  in  none 
of  them  are  the  inhabitants  free  from  decay, 
change,  and  death. 


100   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

The  total  cessation  of  sorrow  and  change  is 
to  be  obtained  by  the  complete  suppression  of 
ignorance  and  desire,  the  attainment  of  Nirvana. 
Transcending  the  six  realms  is  the  Path  of  Holi- 
ness, marked  by  the  following  stages  : — 

1.  The  (JrdvaJca  Stage.     This  is  divided  into 

four    sub-stages  : — 

i.  ^rotdpanna,  he  who  has  entered  the 
Path,  or  a  beginner  in  the  way  of 
enlightenment. 

ii.  SaJcridagdmln,  he  who  has  progressed 
sufficiently  to  enable  him  to  gain 
Nirvana  in  the  next  rebirth.  Ac- 
cordingly he  is  known  as  one  who 
returns  but  once  to  the  three 
worlds   (of   Kama,   Eupa,   Arupa). 

iii.  Andgdmin,  he  who  returns  no  more  to 
the  three  worlds,  acquiring  Nir- 
vana in  the  next  life  (i.e.  in  heaven). 

iv.  Arhat,  he  who  has  freed  himself  com- 
pletely from  the  wheel  of  life,  and 
who  is  to  reincarnate  no  more. 

2.  The  Pratyeka  Buddha  Stage.  One  who  has 
understood  the  chain  of  causality  (the  12 
Nidanas).  This  state  is  one  of  enlighten- 
ment as  contrasted  with  the  mere  salvation 
of  the  Arhat,  but  enlightenment  for  one- 


THE  NATURE  AND  POWERS  OF  BUDDHAHOOD  101 

self   alone,    no    attempt    being    made   to 
influence  or  assist  mankind. 

3.  The  Bodhisattva  Stage,  The  Bodhisattva 
is  he  who  renounces  the  attainment  of 
of  Arhatship  and  Pratyeka  Buddhahood, 
and  having  become  a  candidate  for  com- 
plete Buddhahood  strives  for  the  welfare 
of  all  sentient  beings,  making  the  four 
great  vows,  and  practising  the  six  trans- 
cendent virtues  (paramitas).  a.  The 
four  vows  are  : — (1)  to  save  all  beings, 
(2)  to  destroy  all  passions,  (3)  to  know 
and  teach  others  the  truth,  (4)  to  lead 
others  to  the  path  of  Buddhahood. 
b.  The  six  paramitas  are  : — (l)almsgiving 
and  teaching  the  ignorant,  (2)  keeping  the 
Qilas  or  moral  Laws,  (3)  patience  and  long 
suffering,  (4)  diligence  in  keeping  the 
vows,  (5)  meditation  or  contemplation, 
(6)  wisdom. 

4.  The  Buddha  Stage.  He  who  has  attained 
the  goal,  achieving  supreme  and  final 
enlightenment  and  emancipation,  possess- 
ing the  three  bodies  of  Nirmanakaya, 
Sambhogakaya,  and  Dharmakaya. 

To  each  of  these  stages  are  assigned  certain 
spiritual  prerogatives,  the  possession  of  certain 


102   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

transcendent  virtues,  and  the  ability  to  perform 
certain  supernatural  acts.  With  these  we  are  not 
concerned  for  they  play  a  comparatively  small 
part  in  philosophic  Buddhism. 

What  is  of  more  importance  is  the  question 
of  the  limitation  of  the  attainment  of  the  supreme 
goal.  Hinayana  asserts  that  for  the  majority, 
the  vast  majority  of  people,  the  attainment  of 
the  higher  stages  is  out  of  the  question,  and  the 
ordinary  person  must  content  himself  with 
arhatship.  Undeveloped  Mahay  ana  declares 
that  all  who  desire  to  take  the  vows  of  the 
Bodhisattva  and  continue  therein  will  sooner  or 
later  attain  to  Buddhahood,  yet  that  many  do 
not  do  so,  and  aim  merely  after  Arhatship  or 
Pratyeka  Buddhahood,  so  that  for  them  the 
supreme  goal  is  forever  closed.  It  is  possible, 
however,  for  the  aspirants  after  the  lower  stages 
whose  course  has  not  yet  been  definitely  fixed 
to  modify  their  goal,  and  to  enter  the  path  of  the 
Bodhisattva. 

Developed  Mahayana,  such  as  the  Kegon  and 
the  Tendai  and  later  schools  declared  that  in 
reality  there  are  not  three  goals  but  only  one 
goal — the  highest,  Buddhahood,  which  sooner  or 
later  everyone  must  attain.  The  other  seeming 
goals  are  but  upaya  (devices)  which  the  Tatha- 


THE  NATURE  AND  POWERS  OF  BUDDHAHOOD  103 

gata  has  used  for  the  purpose  of  bringing  his 
children  (all  sentient  beings)  from  the  burning 
house  of  the  three  worlds. 

On  this  point  all  schools  of  true  Mahayana  are 
essentially  agreed,  though  the  Tendai  and  Kegon 
sects  choose  to  emphasize  different  aspects  of  the 
same  idea.  The  Tendai  Doctrine  is  known  as 
the  Dokyo  or  doctrine  of  Sameness,  the  Kegon  as 
the  BeTcTcyo  or  the  doctrine  of  Difference.  The 
former  insists  upon  the  unity  of  the  goal,  the  fact 
that  all  paths  lead  to  the  same  gateway.  The 
latter  declares  that  though  the  goal  is  one,  the 
paths  are  many,  and  that  there  is  a  different  path 
for  every  type  of  mind,  that  each  school  of 
thought,  in  fact  each  religion,  is  but  a  different 
path,  and  that  accordingly  we  are  to  seek  for 
the  underlying  unity  in  aspiration  of  all. 

The  different  branches  of  Buddhism  differ 
even  more  decisively  upon  the  means  of  attain- 
ing   Buddhahood. 

Three    principal    methods    are    inculcated  : — 

1.  Salvation  by  Works, 

2.  Salvation    by    Knowledge, 

3.  Salvation   by    Faith   or   Devotion. 

1.     Salvation  by  Works. 
Hinayana  with  its  insistence  upon  the  doctrine 
of  Karma  declared  with  St.  Paul,  "  as  ye  sow  so 


104   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

shall  ye  reap  " — that  by  the  performance  of 
good  deeds  a  man  reaps  his  rewards  and  gradu- 
ally attains  a  higher  and  higher  state  until  the 
'^supreme  goal  is  reached.  Do  so  many  good  acts, 
and  in  your  next  life  you  will  be  a  king.  Acquire 
so  much  more  merit  (though  of  a  somewhat 
more  transcendental  type)  and  Buddhahood  will 
be  achieved.  This  is  the  message  of  Hinayana. 
This  idea  has  its  benefits  in  encouraging 
charity  and  discouraging  evil  living,  but,  on  the 
other  hand,  it  leads  to  hypocrisy  and  "  dead 
letterisnh"  The  bestowment  of  alms  will  com- 
pensate for  a  neglect  of  the  development  of  the 
spiritual  faculties. 

2.  Salvation  by  Knowledge. 
Mahayana,  keeping  in  mind  the  fact  that 
Buddhahood  is  a  state  of  mind  and  not  a  place  of 
existence,  has  insisted  that  much  depends  upon 
the  condition  of  the  mind  and  soul,  and  that 
consequently  more  importance  is  to  be  placed 
on  their  development  than  upon  the  acquirement 
of  merit  through  any  external  means.  Though 
there  is  no  sharp  distinction  to  be  made,  in 
Hinayana  in  calculating  the  reward  of  an  act  of 
charity,  the  amount  given  is  largely  taken  into 
consideration,    in    Mahayana    emphasis    is    laid 


THE  NATURE  AND  POWERS  OF  BUDDHAHOOD  105 

upon  the  spirit  in  which  the  alms  are  bestowed/-"^ 
As  an  example  of  this  we  find  the  Japanese 
(Mahayanist)  Emperor  Seimu  had  engraved  upon 
a  bronze  pillar  the  sentence  "  a  light  bestowed  by 
a  poor  man  will  be  of  much  more  worth  than  a 
million  lights  offered  by  a  rich  man,"  and  "  If  a 
man  approves  a  good  thing  in  another  man  it 
will  have  the  same  effect  as  if  he  had  done  it 
himself."  Accordingly,  like  the  Vedanta 
school  of  Hinduism,  the  Shodomon  school  of 
Mahayana  teach  that  Enlightenment  is  to  be 
gained  chiefly  through  philosophic  insight,  and 
realization. 

3.  Salvation  by  Faith. 
The  later  Shin  sect  declares  that  the  chief 
fault  with  this  idea  is  that  if  people  are  persuaded 
that  they  will  be  "  saved  "  by  knowledge  they 
will  indulge  in  logical  hair-splitting  and  useless 
metaphysics  rather  than  engage  in  the  cultivation 
of  spirituality.  Accordingly  the  Jodomon  and 
more  especially  the  progressive  Shin  sect  teaches 
that  the  only  means  of  acquiring  the  Buddha 
state  is  through  devotion  or  faith  in  the  Universal 
Buddha  typified  by  Amitabha.  This  "  faith  " 
might  be  better  expressed  by  the  words  "  de- 
votional realization,"  or  self -surrender.  As  in 
Protestant  Christianity,   which  holds  a  similar 


106   INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

conception,  faith  will  always  be  followed  by  good 
works. 

The  real  meaning  of  this,  of  course,  is  that  man 
catches  a  glimpse  of  the  true  Buddha  nature, 
which  results  in  the  awakening  of  faith  in  his 
own  heart.  This  results,  first,  in  the  increase  in 
the  knowledge  of  Amitabha  and  further  increase 
of  faith,  etc.,  and  second,  in  the  Jio-on  or  the 
performance  of  good  works  out  of  thanksgiving. 

Faith  and  works  are  therefore  identical,  as  are 
also  faith  and  the  object  of  faith  (this  is  a  typic- 
ally Mahayana  conception)  since  in  Mahayana 
the  subject  and  object,  the  Universal  Buddha  and 
sentient  beings  are  one. 

Each  of  the  two  great  schools  of  Mahayana, 
the  Shodomon  and  the  Jodomon,  is  again 
divided  into  two,  Zen,  the  gradual  and  Ton,  the 
sudden  schools,  i.e., 

Hinaydna  (Indirect)  1.    Qrdvalcas    (aspirants 

after  Arhatship). 
2.  Pratyeka  Buddhas. 
Mahdydna  (Direct)     3.  Bodhisattvas. 

j.  Gradual. 

a.  Shodomon,    Shilshutsu. 

b.  Jodomon,  Oshutsu. 
ii.  Abrupt. 

a.  ShodOmon,  ShUchO. 

b.  Jodomon,  Ocho. 


THE  NATURE  AND  POWERS  OF  BUDDHAHOOD  107 

The  gradual  schools  of  Shodomon,  consisting 
chiefly  of  the  Madhyamika  and  Yogacarya 
schools  of  Indian  Mahayana,  teach  that  a 
man  continues  to  be  reborn  on  earth  until  he 
gradually  passes  one  by  one  through  the  various 
stages  of  discipleship  and  Bodhisattvahood,  of 
which  the  last  ten  and  most  important  stages 
are  : — 

1.  Pramudita. 

2.  Vimila. 

3.  Prabhakarl. 

4.  Argismati. 

5.  Sudurjana. 

6.  Abhimukti. 

7.  Diirangama. 

8.  Acala. 

9.  Sadhumati. 
10.  Dharmamegha. 

The  abrupt  school  of  the  Shodomon,  consisting 
chiefly  of  the  Avatamsaka,  Tendai,  and  more 
especially  the  Shingon  (Mantra)  and  Zen  (Dhy- 
ana)  school  teaches  that  it  is  not  necessary  to 
pass  through  each  one  of  these  stages  successively, 
for  proper  realization  may  enable  one  to  jump 
over  or  leave  out  several  stages  or  even  to  pass 
at  one  step  from  the  lowest  to  the  highest  degree. 

H 


108   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

The  Jodomon  teaches  that  salvation  by  one's 
personal  effort  is  difficult  and  useless,  since  we 
have  at  our  command  the  omnipotent  and  all 
embracing  Tariki  (other  power)  of  Amitabha, 
the  Universal  Buddha  who  is,  however,  the  true 
self  of  each  one  of  us.  Accordingly,  if  we 
practise  the  Tariki  and  have  a  deep  devotion  to 
the  one  Buddha  we  shall  enter  at  death  into  the 
Pure  Land  of  Amitabha,  which  is  the  surest  and 
quickest  way  to  gain  Buddhahood.  Consequently 
in  the  view  of  the  Gradual  school  of  the  Jodomon » 
to  which  belong  the  Jodo  sect  proper,  the  Pure 
Land  is  but  a  stepping  stone  to  Buddhahood, 
while  the  Abrupt  school,  to  which  belongs  the 
Shin  sect,  teaches  that  entering  Jddomon  is 
equivalent  to  becoming  Buddha. 

II.     The  Attributes  of  the  Buddhas. 

The  path  to  Buddhahood  having  been  dis- 
cussed we  are  now  free  to  consider  the  nature  and 
the  powers  of  the  Buddhas.  In  HInayana  the 
Buddhas,  though  the  highest  of  all  beings  were 
yet  men  pure  and  simple.  Gradually  an  interest- 
ing development  took  place.  Even  in  Hinayana 
the  Buddhas  are  regarded  as  embodiments  of 
the  Dharma  or  Law.  As  the  conception  of  the 
Dharma  body  or  kaya  evolved,  so  did  the  idea 
that    the    Buddha   is    an    embodiment    of    the 


THE  NATURE  AND  POWERS  OF  BUDDHAHOOD  109 

noumenal  world  amplify.  Even  in  the  un- 
developed Mahayana  systems  where  we  find  the 
theory  of  the  Absolute  in  its  first  form,  the  view 
that  the  human  Buddhas  are  one  in  essence  with 
it,  and  consequently  its  material  representatives, 
is  strongly  brought  out. 

In  developed  Mahayana  the  doctrine  of  the 
unity  of  the  Absolute  and  the  human  Buddhas 
has  been  given  added  emphasis.  The  Buddhas 
are  supposed  to  so  perfectly  manifest  the  divine 
essence  that  their  appearance  on  earth  is  equiva- 
lent to  an  appearance  of  divinity.  The  origin 
of  the  Buddhas  is  indeed  human.  They  have 
only  gained  their  high  station  through  a 
long  process  of  evolution,  yet  once  they  have 
brushed  away  the  mists  of  ignorance  the 
Buddha  seed  within  the  heart  of  each  becomes 
apparent — "  the  word  was  made  flesh  and  dwelt 
among  us,  and  we  beheld  his  glory,  glory  as  the 
only  begotten  Son  of  the  Father  full  of  life  and 
truth."  (i.e.  all  Buddhas  are  forms  of  one 
Nirmanakaya,  or  are  one  aspect  of  the  divine.) 

On  the  nature  of  the  unity  of  the  human 
Buddhas  with  the  Universal  Buddha  the  Tendai 
school  again  distinguishes  between  the  Sangai 
and  Sang4  conceptions.  The  Sangai  doctrine, 
as  in  other  cases,  has  a  slight  tendency  towards 


110   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

separateness  in  contradistinction  to  the  doctrine 
of  the  absolute  unity  as  we  find  it  in  the  Sang^ 
system. 

1.     The  Sangai   Conception. 
The  doctrine  of  the  Shugensoku  or  "  assuming 
the  appearance  of  the  Noble  Form." 


5     A//r/r7an<y/f3e/a 

In  this  arrangement  the  Nirmanakaya, 
^akyamuni  or  the  human  Buddha,  is  equal  to 
the  Sambhogakaya,  Amitabha  the  glorified 
Buddha  only  indirectly,  i.e.  through  the  Dhar- 
makaya  which  unites  all  things.  Qakyamuni, 
however,  the  preacher  of  the  Saddharma  Pund- 
arika  Siitra,  while  he  is  not  really  identical  with 
the  Glorified  Buddha  assumes  his  appearance  or 
claim  to  be  equal  and  undivided  for  the  sake  of 
instructing  the  ignorant,  just  as  public  officials 


THE  NATURE  AND  POWERS  OF  BUDDHAHOOD  111 

in  reading  the  proclamations  of  sovereigns 
assume  the  place  of  or  represent  for  the  time 
being  the  sovereign. 

The  chart  representing  the  Sange  doctrine  has 
already  been  given  in  another  place  (page  93) 
but  it  will  be  perhaps  as  well  to  repeat  it  here. 

II.     The  Sange  Conception. 

The  doctrine  of  the  FusJmgensolcu  or  "  IS'on- 
assumption  of  the  appearance  of  the  Noble 
Form." 


l^/iar/na/rai/o 


Sa/776/?og£rA£/i/a  A//r/r7a/7a/rac/(Sr 


In  this  arrangement  the  Nirmanakaya, 
^akyamuni,  and  other  physical  Buddhas  are 
absolutely  and  directly  equal,  so  that  the  human 
Buddhas  are  as  perfectly  and  absolutely  divine 
as  the  Christian  of  the  most  orthodox  section 
would  make  the  Christ,  the  only  difference  being 
that  the  Buddhas  according  to  Mahayana  have 
attained  their  position  by  gradual  development. 


112   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

and  also  that  such  incarnations  are  not  unique 
but  comparatively  frequent  in  their  occurrence. 

Moreover,  in  the  Sange  doctrine  the  Nirman- 
akaya  is  both  the  Dharmakaya  and  the  Samb- 
hogakaya ;  The  Sambhogakaya  is  both  the 
Nirmanakaya  and  the  Dharmakaya  ;  and  the 
Dharmakaya  is  both  the  Nirmanakaya  and  the 
Sambhogakaya,  so  complete  is  their  identity. 

This  is  as  far  as  the  idea  evolved  in  China,  but 
in  Japan  where  Buddhism  has  reached  the  highest 
form  the  logical  corroUary  has  been  brought  out, 
viz.,  that  in  every  phenomenon  of  the  Universe 
each  of  the  three  Kayas  is  to  be  found  immanent, 
so  that  in  a  flower  there  is  dormant  the  three 
persons  of  the  Buddhist  trinity. 

While  the  human  Buddhas  were  being  thus 
deified  it  was  but  natural  that  the  conception 
of  their  power  became  amplified.  A  century 
or  so  after  the  death  of  Qakyamuni,  before 
Mahayana  proper  came  into  existence  Hinayana 
Buddhism  was  divided  into  eighteen  schools, 
grouped  together  in  two  main  sections  the 
Sthaviravdda  (literally  "  the  Way  of  the  Elders,") 
and  the  MaJidsdnghilca  (literally  the  "  Great 
Council  School ").  The  first  was  that  which 
retained  the  true  Buddhist  orthodoxy.  Its 
descendant  (in  Pali,   Theravada)  is  the  oflBcial 


THE  NATURE  AND  POWERS  OF  BUDDHAHOOD  113 

Hinayana  of  to-day.  Tlie  second  was  the  more 
heretical,  bolder  in  speculation,  and  more  com- 
prehensive in  aim.  It  was  from  this  that  the 
later  Mahayana  probably  arose.  Especially 
in  matters  concerning  Buddhology  do  we  find 
the  Mahayana  views  foreshadowed,  e.g. : — 

1.  The  Mahasanghika  school  taught  that  the 
body  of  the  Buddha  is  transcendent  and  free 
from  "  original  sin  "  to  use  a  Christian  term  for 
the  Sanskrit  Bhava§rava  while  the  Sthavirav- 
adins  said  that  though  the  Buddha  is  "  enlight- 
ened "  he  is  not  free  from  "  concupiscence  "  or 
taint  of  bodily  existence. 

2.  The  Mahasanghika  taught  that  every- 
thing the  Tathagata  said  was  full  of  spiritual 
meaning,  while  the  opposite  school  declared  that 
though  the  words  of  the  Blessed  One  were  never 
false  yet  that  he  said  many  things  in  the  course 
of  ordinary  social  life  which  had  no  interior  or 
metaphysical  significance. 

3.  According  to  the  Mahasanghika  school  the 
Buddha  needed  no  rest  or  sleep.  His  life  is  as 
long  as  he  desires  it,  while  the  Sthaviravadins 
admitted  that  the  body  of  the  Holy  One  was 
subject  to  the  usual  frailties  of  the  flesh. 

It  should  be  remembered,  however,  that  after 
glorification  of  the  Buddha  had  reached  a  certain 


114   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

point  the  mystic  powers  of  the  Buddhas  were 
relegated  to  the  Sambhogakaya,  the  symbolic 
Buddha,  and  in  later  Mahayana  the  physical 
body  of  the  Buddhas  were  regarded  in  a  more 
normal  light. 

The  great  question  which  all  Occidental 
students  of  Mahayana  propound  is  whether  or 
not  Buddhahood  means  personal  annihilation,  or 
the  extinction  of  the  individuality.  In  Hinayana, 
except  for  certain  rudiments  of  the  idea  of 
continued  existence  in  the  Law,  extinction  of 
personality  is  necessarily  absolute,  since  owing  to 
the  distinction  between  Asamskrita  and  Sam- 
skrita  Dharmas  already  observed  (vide  page  15) 
continued  existence  is  an  evil  which  must  be 
eliminated.  In  Mahayana,  however,  with  its 
doctrine  of  the  Absolute  and  the  Trikaya,  since 
the  Nirmanakaya  (the  human  Buddha)  is  com- 
pletely equal  to  the  Dharmakaya  and  the 
Sambhogakaya  which  are  eternal,  it  follows  that 
the  Nirmanakaya  is  also  eternal,  but  whether 
or  not  this  means  that  the  separate  individual- 
ities of  the  Buddhas  persist  apart  from  the 
whole,  Mahayana  is  not  emphatic  on  either  side. 
In  a  general  way  it  may  be  said  that  true  Maha- 
yana with  the  possible  exception  of  the  Dhyana 
or  Zen  school  favours  the  idea  of  the  persistence 


THE  NATURE  AND  POWERS  OF  BUDDHAHOOD  115 

of  the  individuality.  In  the  Saddharma  Punda- 
rika  Sutra  and  many  others  we  read  of  the 
"  totally  extinct  "  Buddhas  who  re-appear 
before  ^akyamuni  in  their  perfect  form.  The 
Sambhogakaya  is  the  ideal  form  of  all  the  Budd- 
has, yet  while  it  comprehends  them  all,  the 
individual  facet  exists  and  can  not  be  annihilated. 
One  other  feature  which  has  received  a  great 
deal  of  attention  in  Mahayana  is  the  doctrine  of 
the  turning  over  of  merits.  The  idea  is  not 
peculiar  to  Northern  Buddhism.  It  is  found  in 
Hinayana  and  is  discussed  at  length  in  "  The 
Questions  of  King  Milinda."  While  a  man  may 
not  transfer  bad  karma  to  others  he  may  refuse 
to  accept  the  fruit  of  his  good  karma,  which  is 
then  inherited  by  the  world  at  large.  In 
Mahayana  this  point  has  been  especially  empha- 
sized. Bodhisattvas  are  supposed  to  perform 
innumerable  good  deeds  and  to  turn  this  karma 
over  to  all  sentient  beings.  (Compare  in  this 
connection  the  Eoman  Catholic  doctrine  of 
superogatory  acts).  This  is  an  act  which  is 
strongly  encouraged  and  many  Mahayana 
treatises  end  with  the  phrase  "  May  the  merit 
gained  by  the  composition  of  this  work  be  taken 
by  all  sentient  beings,  and  aid  in  the  awakening 
of  their  Buddha  Heart."     Its  equivalence  to  the 


116   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

Christian  doctrine   of   atonement   is,   of   course, 
marked. 

III.     The  Life  of  the  Buddha. 

Finally  a  few  words  must  be  added  concerning 
the  Buddhist  doctrines  relating  to  ^akyamuni 
himself,  the  historical  founder  of  Buddhism. 

In  the  early  stages  of  the  development  of  the 
Mahayana  faith  a  great  deal  of  attention  was 
paid  to  the  incidents  of  the  Buddha's  life.  Details 
were  embellished,  legends  were  invented,  and  all 
the  lavish  adornments  of  a  poetic  imagination 
were  called  in  to  aid  in  glorifying  the  founder's 
name. 

Once  the  conception  of  a  Universal  Buddha 
had  been  attained,  however,  less  emphasis  came 
to  be  laid  on  the  historical  Buddha,  so  that  the 
study  of  Chinese  and  Japanese  Buddhism  throws 
little  fresh  light  on  biographical  points. 

An  excellent  epitome  of  the  main  features  of 
Qakyamuni's  life  as  systematized  by  later  Maha- 
yana is  to  be  found  in  Nanj5's  "  Short  History  of 
the  Twelve  Japanese  Buddhist  Sects  ".  The  es- 
sential points  there  brought  out  are  as  follows : — 

Birth.  Cakyamuni  was  born  in  the  Kingdom 
of  Kapilavastu  in  Central  India,  1027  B.C. 
His  father  was  the  Maharaja  Quddhodhana  and 
his  mother  the  Devi  Maya.     Many  miraculous 


THE  NATURE  AND  POWERS  OF  BUDDHAHOOD    117 

incidents  are  related  of  his  early  life.  A  story 
frequently  represented  is  that  at  the  moment  of 
birth  he  arose  and  taking  seven  steps  in  each 
direction  and  pointing  one  hand  to  the  heavens 
above  and  the  other  to  the  earth  below,  he  pro- 
claimed in  a  loud  voice  "  I  alone  of  all  beings  in 
heaven  or  below  am  worthy  of  honour." 

Early  Life.  At  the  age  of  seven  he  was  master 
of  Astronomy,  Geography,  Arithmetic,  and 
Military  Science,  the  four  branches  of  ancient 
education.  At  ten  he  had  surpassed  all  other 
princes  in  shooting  through  seven  iron  targets. 
At  fifteen  he  was  formally  recognized  as  the 
heir  apparent.  At  seventeen  he  was  betrothed 
to  Yagodhara. 

All  measures  were  taken  to  prevent  him  from 
coming  into  contact  with  sorrow  and  misery, 
but  at  the  age  of  eighteen  he  began  to  think  of 
leaving  home  realizing  how  inherent  in  mundane 
existence  were  the  pains  of  birth,  old  age,  and 
death.  On  the  seventh  day  of  the  second  month 
of  his  nineteenth  year  he  forsook  the  world  and 
entered  the  jungle  in  order  to  attain  enlighten- 
ment. 

EnligJitenment — Preaching  the  Law.  More 
than  ten  years  were  spent  in  fruitless  search,  but 
exactly  eleven  years  afterwards   he   awoke   to 


118   INTRODUCTION    TO    MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

perfect  knowledge  under  the  Bodhi  tree.  After 
his  enlightenment  the  Buddha  sat  for  seven  days 
absorbed  in  meditation  wrapped  in  the  beatitude 
of  the  Law.  He  then  set  about  proclaiming 
his  gospel.  Needless  to  say,  at  the  time  of  his 
enlightenment  the  Buddha  comprehended  the 
profound  truths  of  Mahayana  as  well  as  the 
doctrines  of  the  simpler  Hinayana.  At  first 
he  attempted  to  expound  the  whole  body  of  truth 
in  the  Avatamsaka  Sutra  preached  in  the  second 
week  after  the  attainment  of  Buddhahood. 
Finding,  however,  that  his  auditors  were  unable 
to  comprehend  him  he  decided,  for  the  time 
being,  to  confine  himself  to  the  Hinayana  system 
and  gradually  to  lead  his  followers  into  the  more 
complete  comprehension  of  the  law.  According- 
ly after  the  second  week  of  his  enlightenment 
for  twelve  years  he  taught  only  the  pure  Hinayana 
Sutras.  After  that,  for  another  eight  years  he 
taught  the  Vaipulya  or  developed  Sutras 
which  revealed  the  first  stages  of  Mahayana. 
Subsequently  for  another  twenty  years  he 
taught  a  still  further  stage  of  wisdom  emphasiz- 
ing the  ^unya  doctrine  in  the  Prajnaparamita 
Sutra,  and  others  of  the  same  type.  Finally, 
for  the  last  eight  years  of  his  life  he  returned  to 
the  complete  position  of  truth  in  the  Saddharma 


THE  NATURE  AND  POWERS  OF  BUDDHAHOOD  119 

Pundarika,    the    Nirvana,    and    the    Sukhavati 
Sutras. 

Conversion  to  the  Faith.  In  the  mean  time  the 
even  tenor  of  Qakyamuni's  life  was  disturbed 
by  few  incidents  of  striking  importance.  The 
years  were  spent  as  an  itinerant  mendicant 
teacher,  and  time  was  marked  chiefly  by  the 
retreats  of  the  rainy  season,  and  the  conversion 
to  the  new  faith  of  various  notable  people.  In 
the  fourth  week  of  his  enlightenment  he  con- 
verted the  Nagaraja  Macilinda  On  the  seventh 
day  of  the  third  month  he  won  over  Devapala. 
On  the  following  day  we  journeyed  to  Varanasi 
where  Kaundinya  and  others  were  converted. 
At  the  age  of  thirty-one  he  converted  the  Qre§- 
thin  or  wealthy  merchant  Ya^as.  Then  he  went 
to  the  powerful  Kingdom  of  Magadha,  then  the 
home  of  Indian  Culture,  and  converted  Uruvilva 
Kagyapa  and  others.  Then  proceeding  to 
Eajagriha,  the  capital,  he  converted  the  king 
Bimbisara  and  his  retainers.  From  this 
period  dates  the  recognition  and  popularity  of 
Buddhism  as  a  religion.  In  the  same  year  the 
wealthy  merchant  Kalya  presented  to  the 
Buddha  and  his  order  of  monks  the  famous 
monastery  of  Venuvana,  or  the  Bamboo  Grove. 
At  the  age  of  thirty -two  he  converted  the  nagas 


120   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAN  AY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

and  yaksas  at  Mt.  Gajagir^a.  The  next  year 
Qariputra  and  Mahamaudgalyayana,  later  his 
foremost  apostles,  became  his  disciples.  At 
this  period  those  of  his  disciples  who  had  attained 
to  Nirvana  numbered  twelve  hundred  and  fifty. 
In  the  same  year  Mahakagapa,  the  sage  of  the 
order,  later  revered  as  the  chief  apostle  of 
Mahayana,  became  a  disciple  of  the  Buddha, 
presenting  to  the  Lord  a  robe  of  incalculable 
value. 

At  thirty-four  the  members  of  his  monastic 
order  having  increased  in  number  it  became 
necessary  to  formulate  rules  for  their  organiza- 
tion. Accordingly  in  this  year,  while  at  Vaisali, 
^akyamuni  established  the  Vinaya  or  the  Laws 
of  Discipline,  and  year  by  year,  in  accordance 
with  the  growing  needs  of  the  order,  the  rules 
were  amended  and  amplified.  At  thirty  five 
the  Qresthin  Sudatta  of  Qravasti  together  with 
Prince  Jeta  presented  to  the  Holy  One  the 
Jetavana  Anathapindada  arama  where  many  of 
the  most  important  discourses  of  the  Buddha 
were  delivered. 

In  this  year  the  Lord  returned  to  his  native 
Kapilavastu,  not  having  visited  it  since  his 
flight  from  the  palace  many  years  previously. 
His  father,  King  t^uddhodana  sent  his  retainers 


THE  NATURE  AND  POWERS  OF  BUDDHAHOOD  121 

and  subject  people  to  meet  him  at  a  distance  of 
forty  miles.  Great  was  his  reception  as  befitted 
a  Prince  of  the  Law,  and  upon  his  entrance  into 
the  city  he  discoursed  upon  the  chain  of  causa- 
tion. 

At  thirty-seven  Ananda  his  cousin  and  later 
his  beloved  disciple,  the  Buddhist  St.  John, 
entered  the  Order  when  only  eight  years  old. 
At  thirty-eight  Eahula,  his  son  by  Yagodhara, 
became  his  disciple,  when  only  nine  years  of  age. 
At  thirty-nine  the  Buddha  once  more  visited 
Magadha  and  converted  King  Pusya  (?).  In 
this  year  a  votive  altar,  the  first  of  many,  was 
erected  in  Jetavana  grove. 

At  forty  Qakyamuni  discoursed  to  Maitreya, 
he  who  is  to  be  the  next  Buddha,  upon  the  deep 
meaning  of  the  Law.  At  forty-one  he  returned 
to  Kapilavastu  a  second  time  whereupon  his 
father  and  his  father's  court  advanced  in  the 
comprehension  of  the  truth.  In  this  year  his 
aunt  Mahaprajapati  left  the  world  and  became  a 
Bik§uni  or  Buddhist  nun. 

Later  Life.  The  next  few  years  are  chiefly 
noted  for  the  famous  sermons  which  were 
delivered  during  this  period.  At  forty-four  he 
preached  on  Mt.  Lanka  in  the  Southern  Seas. 
From  forty-five  to  forty-nine  he  discoursed  at 


122   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

intervals  to  Buddlias  and  Bodhisvattvas  assemb- 
led in  the  ten  quarters  of  the  Universe  upon  a 
miraculous  staircase  made  between  the  world 
of  desire,  (the  kamadhatu)  and  world  of  form 
(rupadhatu).  Thereafter  the  Buddha  gradually 
led  his  followers  into  the  path  of  Mahayana. 
At  the  age  of  seventy-five,  his  father  died.  At 
the  age  of  seventy-nine  which  was  in  949  B.C. 
the  Buddha  ascended  to  the  Trayatimsa  Heaven 
and  discoursed  to  his  mother  Queen  Maya. 
Eeturning  to  earth  he  gave  his  last  sermon. 
At  midnight  of  the  fifteenth  day  of  the  second 
month  of  the  same  year  the  Buddha  entered 
Parinirvana,  lying  down  in  an  avenue  of  Qala 
trees  near  the  city  of  Ku^inaga.  He  was 
mourned  by  all  the  sentient  beings  of  the 
Universe. 

These  may  be  said  to  represent  the  main  points 
in  the  popular  Mahayana  legends  of  the  Buddha. 
A  comparison  of  it  with  the  Southern  accounts 
is  full  of  interest,  but  lies  outside  the  scope  of 
our  present  undertaking. 

What  is  of  especial  importance  is  the  way  in 
which  an  attempt  has  been  made  to  insert  the 
preaching  of  the  various  Mahayana  Siitras  into 
the  different  periods  of  the  Buddha's  life.  Ma- 
haynna,  at  least  as  a  definite  system,  was  un- 


THE  NATURE  AND  POWERS  OF  BUDDHAHOOD  123 

doubtedly  the  result  of  several  centuries  of 
philosophic  development  probably  in  contact 
with  alien  influences.  The  language  and  style 
of  the  Mahayana  stitras  differs  greatly  from  those 
of  Hlnayana.  Its  doctrines  present  even  greater 
divergence. 

Since,  however,  Qakyamuni  was  retained  as  the 
historical  founder  and  as  the  ultimate  source  of 
all  the  ahaylater  Mana  doctrine,  it  became 
necessary  to  evolve  some  explanation  of  how  such 
different  views  originated  in  one  person,  for  it 
must  be  remembered  that  while  Hinayana  re- 
gards Mahayana  as  a  corruption  of  the  original 
Buddhism,  or  at  best  as  a  false  and  decadent 
branch,  Mahayana  regards  Hinayana  not  as 
false  or  contrary  to  true  Buddhism,  but 
simply  as  incomplete  or  the  superficial  doctrine 
which  Qakyamuni  taught  to  those  who  were 
incapable  of  comprehending  the  more  profound 
truths  of  Mahayana. 

In  the  early  days  several  different  and  mutu- 
ally contradictory  syntheses  of  the  Buddha's 
life  were  formulated  which  would  allow  room  for 
all  aspects  of  Buddhism.  The  most  plausible 
and  the  one  which  eventually  came  to  be  con- 
sidered the  Orthodox  explanation  was  that 
expounded  by  the  Chinese  Chiki,  the  founder 


124  INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 


of  the  Tendai  school  of  Mahayana.  This  con- 
sisted of  the  theory  of  the  five  periods  of  Qaky- 
amuni's  life,  the  four  classes  of  doctrine  which  he 
delivered,  and  of  the  four  styles  of  teaching. 

Their   mutual   relationship   is   shewn   in   the 
following  chart  : — 


t-JuMen 


£..CnTtfua/ 


Ji.Secrrf  ^..i/hdfftrfminnf 


/..  ^uala/njaAa 


2.^^ama  J_  l&i/Ju/^i 


/..  Atafra 


2  .Me/me,//a/e    J  U>///e/-enfiafei^         4./iffeef 


This  graph  appears  far  more  complicated 
than  in  reality  it  is.  The  three  categories  when 
taken  separately  are  simplicity  itself. 

{a.)  The  Five  Periods. 

The  five  periods  have  already  been  examined 
in  our  brief  review  of  the  Buddha's  life.  They 
are  named  after  the  principal  stitras  which  were 
preached  in  their  respective  periods. 

The  first  period  beginning  in  the  second  week 
of  the  Holy  One's  enlightenment  was  that  in 
which  he  delivered  the  Avatamsaka  Sutra 
containing  the  Mahayana  philosophy  in  all  of  its 
profundity.  This  work  is  one  of  the  most  im- 
portant in  the  whole  Mahayana  canon.     Upon 


THE  NATURE  AND  POWERS  OF  BUDDHAHOOD  125 

it  was  founded  one  of  the  two  great  Mahay - 
ana  metaphysical  schools  of  China.  Textual 
criticism  shews  it  to  be  undoubtedly  of  late 
composition,  but  it  is  an  invaluable  storehouse 
of  information  concerning  the  development  of 
the  Buddhist  philosophy.  It  is  a  great  pity 
that  up  to  the  present  time  no  attempt  has 
been   made   to    translate  it   into  English. 

The  Buddha,  finding  this  incomprehensible 
to  the  masses,  next  preached  the  Agama  Sutras, 
containing  the  fundamental  principles  of  Hina- 
yana.  There  are  four  Agamas  which  are 
practically  identical  with  the  four  Nikayas  of 
Southern  Buddhism,  which  (sometimes  with 
the  addition  of  an  added  fifth)  compose  the 
Sutta  (Sutra)  Pitaka  or  division  of  the  Pali 
Canon.  Much  of  the  Pali  version  has  been 
rendered  into  English,  so  that  an  important  task 
for  future  scholars  is  to  compare  it  with  the 
Chinese  translation  of  the  Agamas. 

The  majority  of  his  pupils  having  at  length 
passed  beyond  this  stage  the  Master  then  de- 
livered the  Vaipulya  Sutras.  Literally  these 
mean  the  Expanded  Discourses  and  betray  an 
afflorescence  both  as  regards  style  and  doctrine. 
Practically  none  of  these  are  to  be  found  in  the 
Southern  canon,  but  in  most  of  the  Vaipulya 


126  INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

sutras  the  Mahay  an  a  teachings  presented  are 
in  a  decidedly  rudimentary  state. 

They  are  chiefly  marked  by  the  growth  of  the 
Buddha  legend,  and  the  introduction  of  many 
supernatural  elements,  though  the  later  theories 
of  the  Bodhisattva  ideal  and  of  the  Universal 
Buddha  are  set  forth  in  a  more  or  less  undevelop- 
ed state.  To  this  period  belong  the  important 
Sutras  the  Vimalaklrtti  Nirde§a  Sutra,  the 
Lankavatara  Sutra,  and  the  Maha  vaipulya 
Sannipata  Sutra.  These  sutras  are  frequently 
cited  even  by  the  developed  Mahayana  schools- 

The  next  or  fourth  period  was  occupied  in 
delivering  the  Maha-prajiia-paramita  SUtra  and 
others  of  a  like  nature.  In  these  the  doctrine 
of  Qtinya  was  fully  developed,  and  by  negating 
negation  the  idea  of  the  transcending  Middle 
Principle  (Madhya)  above  existence  and  non- 
existence was  formulated. 

The  fifth  and  final  period  was  once  more  de- 
voted to  the  pure  and  undiluted  Mahayana 
doctrine.  To  this  belong  the  Saddharma 
Pundarika  Sutra,  perhaps  the  most  important 
of  the  Mahayana  Sutras,  and  the  Nirvana  Stitra 
which  is  much  studied  in  China  and  is  not  to  be 
confused  with  a  Hinayana  Stitra  with  a  similar 
name.     Finally  there   was   also   the   two    most 


THE  NATURE  AND  POWERS  OF  BUDDHAHOOD     2 

famous  Sukhavati  Sutras,  tlie  Amitayur  Dhyana 
Stitra  and  the  Sukhavativyuha  Sutra,  on  which 
are  based  the  Paradise  seeking  sects  which  play 
such  an  important  part  in  later  Mahayana. 
(6,)   The  Four  Classes  of  Doctrine 

The  synthesis  expounded  by  Tendai  Daishi 
(as  Chikti  was  later  called)  goes  on  to  state 
that  all  the  teachings  of  Buddhism  may  be 
classified  into  four  groups,  different  aspects 
of  which  were  revealed  during  the  above  men- 
tioned five  periods  of  Qakyamuni's  life. 

The  first  of  these  is  the  Zo  or  Tripitaka 
doctrine,  meaning  in  this  instance  by  the  Trip- 
itaka only  the  orthodox  Hinayana  system 
expounded  in  the  Abhidharma  Ko§a,  and  also 
the  primitive  ^unya  school  founded  on  the 
Satya  Siddhi  ^astra.  This  class  corresponds 
exactly  to  the  Agama  period  of  the  Buddha's 
life  though  occasionally  touched  upon  by  the 
Vaipulya  Siitras. 

The  next  in  the  order  of  development  is  the 
Tsu,  or  intermediate  school,  so-called  because  it 
is  the  system  which  is  intermediate  between  the 
Tripitaka  doctrines  and  the  later  and  more 
perfect  doctrines  of  true  Mahayana.  To  this 
class  belong  the  Dharamalaksana  or  Yogacarya 
and  the  Trigastra  or  the  Madhyamika  school. 


128   INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

The  Tsu  or  intermediate  doctrine  was  taught 
both  in  the  Vaipulya  and  the  Prajna-paramita 
periods. 

With  the  third  class,  the  Betsu  or  Differ- 
entiated doctrine,  we  at  length  reach  real  Maha- 
yana.  In  this  school,  which  is  perhaps  most 
characteristic  of  the  Avatamsaka  sect  the  Trans- 
cending Middle  Principle  (Madhya)  is  formulated  ; 
but  in  this  case  it  is  the  transcendality  which  is 
insisted  upon.  It  is  above  all  things  and  can  be 
attained  only  by  going  through  ten  stages  of 
1.  The  Naraka  or  Hells  ;  2.  The  realm  of  the 
Pretas,  or  Goblins  ;  3.  Animals  ;  4.  The  realm  of 
the  Asuras  ;  5.  Mankind  ;  6.  The  Devas  ; 
7.  The  stage  of  the  Qravaka  ;  or  hearers  (as- 
pirants after  Arhatship)  ;  8.  Pratyeka  Buddhas  ; 
and  9.  Bodhisattvas  leading  up  to  the  tenth  and 
last  stage  of  true  Buddhahood,  which  is  synony- 
mous with  the  Middle  Principle.  This  root  of 
existence  though  above  the  Universe  or  rather 
though  far  more  than  the  universe  yet  ever  aids 
at  making  all  sentient  beings  attain  emancipation 
and  so  instead  of  revealing  only  the  one  road 
{dohyd)  it  uses  many  updya  (means)  and  teaches 
in  many  different  manners,  (Betsu-kyo  or 
Bekkyo)  to  suit  the  exigencies  of  the  times.  Ac- 
cordingly it  is  called  the  Differentiated  school. 


THE  NATURE  AND  POWERS  OF  BUDDHAHOOD  129 

This  was  inculcated  in  the  Vaipulya,  Prajiia 
paramita  and  Avatamsaka  periods,  but  most 
purely  in  the  last. 

The  fourth  and  highest  doctrine  is  that  of 
En  or  Completeness.  This  is  the  teaching 
which  emphasises  the  immanence  as  well  as  the 
transcendence  of  the  Absolute  and  seeks  to  find 
the  Universal  Buddha  in  the  lowest  inhabitant 
of  hell  as  well  as  in  the  supremely  illuminated  sage. 
The  doctrines  of  Completeness  as  taught  in  the 
Avatamsaka  Sutra  (the  shaJcu-en  or  old  complete- 
ness as  it  is  called)  is  merely  the  highest  of  the 
four  classes  of  doctrine,  while  the  En  of  the 
Saddharma  Pundarika  Sutra  (the  Icon-en  or  the 
new  completeness)  is  the  only  doctrine  in  which 
all  the  others  are  included. 

(c.)     The  Four  Styles  of  Teaching. 

The  four  modes  of  Qakyamuni's  instruction 
require  but  little  attention.  The  first  or  Ton 
means  suddenness  and  is  the  method  whereby 
the  learner  is  told  directly  and  immediately  the 
whole  truth.  The  second,  the  Zen  or  the 
Gradual  method,  was  to  lead  the  student  step  by 
step  through  all  the  stages  on  the  path.  The 
first  belongs  exclusively  to  the  Avatamsaka 
period,  and  the  second  to  the  Vaipulya,  Agama, 
and  Prajna  paramita  periods. 


130  INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

The  third  method  is  that  of  Himitsu  or 
Secrecy,  and  may  be  said  to  be  the  esoteric 
transmission  of  truth.  In  this  the  aspirant 
is  initiated  into  the  inner  mysteries  which 
cannot  be  adequately  expounded  in  exoteric 
doctrines. 

The  fourth  and  highest  is  the  Fujo  or  Undeter- 
mined. In  this  the  Law  is  expounded  in  such  a 
way  that  every  person  may  understand  it 
according  to  his  capacity.  The  same  sutramay 
be  used  for  persons  of  different  profundity, 
the  less  intelligent  receiving  therefrom  the  same 
stimulus  as  the  most  enlightened  though  the 
actual  substance  extracted  therefrom  will  differ 
with  each  individual. 

Both  the  third  and  the  fourth  styles  of  teach- 
ing belong  to  the  first  four  periods,  while  the 
fifth  period  is  in  reality  beyond  all  manners  and 
styles,  though  more  particularly  connected  with 
the  Fuj5  or  Undetermined  Style. 

The  doctrine  of  the  five  periods,  four  classes 
of  doctrine,  and  four  styles  of  teaching  is  the 
most  important  synthesis  of  Qakyamuni's  life, 
but  it  is  by  no  means  the  only  one.  The  only 
other  two  which  require  attention  are  the  three 
doctrine,  and  five  doctrine  classification  of 
the  Buddhas'  life. 


THE  NATURE  AND  POWERS  OF  BUDDHAHOOD  131 

According  to  the  three  doctrine  theory  which 
is  taught  by  the  Dharmalak^ana,  or  Yogacarya 
school,  Qakyamuni  taught,  first,  the  doctrine 
of  the  existence  of  all  phenomena,  or  the  doctrine 
of  Being  {Jce),  second,  the  doctrine  that  all  such 
existence  is  purely  relative  or  the  doctrine  of 
Becoming  (lit.,  Tcu  or  non-existence)  and  third, 
the  doctrine  of  the  Middle  Principle  (chu) 
which  transcends  both  existence  and  non- 
existence. 

The  five-fold  division  of  Gautama's  life  is 
made  by  the  Avatamsaka  (Kegon)  school  and 
consists  of  (1)  Sho  or  the  doctrine  of  smallness, 
in  which  the  primitive  EQnayana  doctrines  are 
inculcated,  (2)  Shi  the  doctrine  of  beginning, 
in  which  the  undeveloped  Mahayana  doctrines 
are  unfolded,  (3)  Ju  or  the  end  in  which  the 
purely  metaphysical  aspect  of  Mahayana 
reached  its  final  development,  (4)  Ton  or  sudden- 
ness, the  doctrine  of  the  immediate  intuition 
of  Truth  without  words  or  symbols  associated 
with  the  teachings  of  the  Dhyana  school,  and 
finally  (5)  En  or  the  doctrine  of  Completion, 
associated  with  the  Avatamsaka  Sect  in  which  the 
perfection  fruition  of  all  the  other  schools  is 
to  be  found. 


CHAPTEE   V 

PSYCHOLOGT-^ELEMENTS    OF 
EXISTENCE 

I.     The  Analysis  of  the  Personality 

One  of  the  most  difficult  points  for  Western 
students  of  all  forms  of  Buddhism  to  understand 
is  the  doctrine  of  Anatman,  which  is  unusually- 
translated  "  soullessness."  Buddhism  insists 
that  the  soul  is  not  a  rigid  unchanging, 
self-constituted  entity,  but  a  living,  complex, 
changing,  evolving  organism.  Non-Buddhistic 
philosophers  have  usually  supposed  that  the 
soul  is  a  simple  substance  which  inhabits  the 
body  and  which  after  death  is  rendered  free 
from  the  shackles  of  corporeality.  This  is  the 
core  of  the  Hindu  theory  of  the  atman. 

In  Buddhism  the  theory  of  anitya  or  im- 
permanency  is  applied  even  to  the  psychic  life, 
largely  on  the  analogy  of  the  human  body. 
The  body  exists  but  it  has  no  self  essence,  i.e. 
it  is  made  up  of  component  parts  which,  in  many 


PSYCHOLOGY  133 

cases,  are  constantly  replaced.  There  is  no  one 
centre  of  the  body  which  is  its  ultimate  essence, 
for  neither  the  heart  nor  the  brain,  etc.,  could 
function  without  the  other  organs.  Since  the 
material  parts  of  which  it  is  composed  are 
continually  changing,  in  one  sense  it  may  be 
said  that  our  bodies  of  to-day  are  not  identical 
with  our  bodies  of  yesterday,  yet  it  is  obvious 
that  they  are  not  different  since  they  have  a 
sequential,  or  causal,  or  what  the  Buddhists 
would  call  a  karmaic  connection. 

All  this,  says  Buddhism,  applies  equally  to 
the  soul.  There  is  no  atman  for  the  personality 
consists  of  five  skandhas  or  aggregates,  or 
faculties,  viz.  : — (1)  Rupay  body  or  form,  in 
other  words  the  physical  body,  (2)  Vedana  sen- 
sation or  perception,  (3)  Samjna  conception  or 
ratiocination,  (4)  SamsMra  mental  qualities, 
such  as  love,  hate,  etc.,  and  (5)  Vijnana  con- 
sciousness, more  especially  in  this  connection, 
self-consciousness.  None  of  these  can  claim 
pre-eminence.  One  is  not  the  basis  around 
which  the  others  are  grouped.  They  are  all 
co-ordinated  parts,  constantly  changing,  so  that 
at  no  two  moments  can  the  personality  claim 
to  be  identical,  yet  at  the  same  tune  there  is  a 
constant  Karmaic  persistence. 


134  INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

This  division  of  the  personality  into  five 
skandhas  (Pali  Khandhas)  is  undoubtedly  very 
ancient,  and  probably  goes  back  to  the  time  of 
Qakyamuni  himself.  The  keen  pleasure  which 
the  Indian  mind  takes  in  metaphysical  analysis 
and  dissection,  however,  would  not  allow  this 
simple  formula  to  stand  alone  and  later  systems 
divided  each  skandha  into  a  number  of  fundamen- 
tal elements.  In  the  Sthaviravada  or  Theravada 
school  of  Hinayana  represented  by  the  Order  in 
Ceylon,  Burma,  and  Siam,  we  find  the  following 
classification  of  each  of  the  skandhas  : — 
The  Five  8kandhas  and  their  Divisions. 

1.  Bupa,  or  material  qualities,  27  (or  28)  in 
number.  Four  elements,  earth,  water,  fire,  and 
air.  Five  sense  organs,  eye,  ear,  nose,  tongue, 
body.  Four  sense  objects,  form  sound,  smell, 
taste.  Two  distinctions  of  sex,  male  and  female. 
Three  essential  conditions,  mental  action,  vital 
spirits,  food.  Two  means  of  communication, 
gesture  and  speech.  Seven  qualities  of  material 
bodies,  buoyancy,  pliancy,  adaptability,  integra- 
tion, continuance  of  integration,  decay  and 
impermanency. 

2.  Vedand  or  sensation,  3  or  5  in  number. 
Three,  pleasurable,  painful,  neutral.  Two  or 
more  are  sometimes  added,  mental  and  physical 
sensation. 


PSYCHOLOGY  ISS 

3.  SamjM  {Sanna)  or  Conception,  6  in 
number.  One  for  eacli  of  the  senses,  and  one 
mental.  "  The  Perception  of  *  bine  '  for  instance 
is  classed  under  sight,  or  '  sweet  '  nnder  taste 


75 


4.  SamsMra  (SanJcJidra)  Mental  Qualities.  52 
in  number.  Seven  mental  properties  which  are 
common  to  every  act  of  consciousness,  viz  : — (1) 
contact  (phassa),  (2)  sensation  (vedana),  (4) 
conception  (sanna),  (5)  volition,  (cetana)  (6)  in- 
dividualization of  object  (ekaggata),  (7)  mental 
alertness  (Jivitindriya),  (8)  attention  (manasi- 
kara). 

Six  mental  properties  which  sometimes  are  and 
sometimes  are  not  present  in  consciousness, 
\iz  : — (1)  initial  application  (vitakka),  (2)  sus- 
tained application  (vicara),  (3)  deciding  as  to 
object  (adhimokkha),  (4)  effort  (viriya),  (5) 
pleasurable  interest  (piti),  (6)  impulse  (chanda). 

Fourteen  evil  mental  qualities,  viz  : — (1)  dull- 
ness (moha),  (2)  impudence  (ahirika),  (3)  reckless- 
ness (anotappa),  (4)  distraction  (uddhacca),  (5) 
greed  (lobha),  (6)  error  (dhittha),  (7)  conceit, 
(mana),  (8)  hate  (dosa),  (9)  envy  (issa),  (10) 
selfishness  (macchariya),  (11)  worry  (kukkucca), 
(12)  sloth  (thina),  (13)  torpor  (middha),  (14) 
perplexity  (vicikiccha). 


136  INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

Nineteen  virtuous  mental  qualities,  viz  : — (1) 
faith  (saddha),  (2)  mindfullness  (sati),  (3)  pru- 
dence (hiri),  (4)  discretion  (otappa),  (5)  dis- 
interestedness (alobha),  (6)  amity  (adosa),  (7) 
Balance  of  mind  (tatramajjattata),  (8)  composure 
(passaddhi)  of  body^  or  (9)  of  mind,  (10)  buoy- 
ancy (lahuta),  of  body  or  (11)  of  mind,  (12) 
pliancy  (muduta)  of  body  or  (13)  of  mind,  (14) 
adaptability  (kammaiiiiata)  of  body  or  (15)  of 
mind,  (16)  proficiency  (Paguiinata)  of  body  or 
(17)  of  mind,  (18)  rectitude  (ujukata)  of  body  or 
(19)  of  mind. 

Three    forms    of    propriety,    viz  : — (1)    right 
speech,  (2)  right  action,  and  (3)  right  livelihood. 
Two  illimitables,  (1)  pity,  and  (2)  appreciation. 
One  supreme  possession,  reason  (paiina). 

5.  Vijndna  {Vinndna)  or  Consciousness. 
In  the  South  it  is  usual  to  divide  consciousness 
into  89  classes  from  the  point  of  view  of  the 
merit  or  demerit  resulting  from  different  forms 
of  consciousness.  These  do  not  especially  con- 
cern us.  The  six-fold  division  of  consciousness  is 
also  found,  these  six  forms  are,  one  for  each  of 
the  senses,  and  one  purely  "  mental  conscious- 
ness." 

*  Some  would  translate  Kaya  here  by  "  Mental  properties'* 
rather  than  "  Body  "  and  so  below. 


PSYCHOLOGY  137 

In  the  Sarvastivadin  school  of  Hinayana,  an 
attempt  was  made  to  give  a  more  comprehensive 
view  of  the  universe,  and,  as  we  have  seen,  all 
phenomena  were  reduced  to  a  certain  number  of 
fixed  dharmas  or  elements  of  existence.  In  the 
Abhidharma  Koga  they  are  enumerated  as 
seventy-five  in  number.  These  are  in  reality 
nothing  more  than  the  objectification  of  the 
divisions  of  the  skandhas,  arising  from  the 
examination  of  the  parts  of  the  universe  rather 
than  merely  from  the  human  mind.  The 
Sarvastivadins  admit,  however,  that  this  com" 
prehensive  analysis  may  also  be  approached 
from  the  subjective  as  well  as  the  objective 
point  of  view,  so  that  they  present  us  with  the 
following  two-fold  classification  : — 

I.     Subjective   Classification  of  Phenomena. 

A.  The  5  Skandhas  or  the  aggregates  of  being 
which  compose  the  "  soul."  As  in  the  Southern 
account  they  consist  of  Eupa  or  form,  Vedana 
or  sensation,  Samjna  or  conception,  Samskara 
or  mental  qualities,  and  Vijnana  or  consciousness. 
These  five  Skandhas  may  be  broken  down  into 
seventy-five  dharmas,  of  which  in  fact  they  may 
be  considered  compounds. 

B.  The  12  Ayatanas  or,  the  bases  from  which 
mental  action  arises,  Buddhists  argue  that  before 


lie  INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

consciousness  can  function  there  must  be  present 
twelve  things,  namely  the  five  sense  organs, 
the  five  sense  objects,  manas  or  the  percipient 
mind,  and  dharma  or  things  in  general  or  ab- 
Btract  ideas. 

C.  The  18  Dhatus  or  Factors  of  Conscious- 
ness, consist  of  the  12  Ayatanas  plus  the  six 
Vijnana  or  aspects  of  consciousness. 

II.     Objective   Classification  of  Phenomena. 

A.  AsamsJcrita  Dharmas,  simple  or  uncon- 
ditioned elements  of  existence.  These  are  three 
in  number,  namely  (1)  Space  or  Ether  (aka§a), 
(2)  The  unconscious  cessation  of  existence 
(apratisankya-nirodha)  a  form  of  deep  trance, 
and  (3)  conscious  cessation  of  existence,  {prati- 
samkya  nirodha)  which  is  equivalent  to  Nirvana. 

B.  Samskrita  Dharmas  or  conditioned  ele- 
ments of  existence,  so-called,  it  will  be  remember- 
ed, because  though  themselves  simple  and  primal 
they  enter  into  combinations  one  with  another. 
They  are  72  in  number,  divided  in  the  follow- 
ing w^ay  : — 

1.  Rupa  Dharmas  or  material  elements,  11 
in  number,  consisting  of  the  five  sense  organs 
(eye,  ear,  nose,  tongue,  and  body),  the  five  sense 


PSYCHOLOGY  139 

objects  (sight,  sound,  smell,  taste,  and  touch), 
and  avijnapti-rupa,  or  latent  or  unmanifest 
matter. 

2.  Citta  Dharma  or  mental  element,  only- 
one  in  number,  consisting  of  mind  itself,  though 
the  one  mind  is  divided  into  six  vijnana  and  the 
three  modes. 

3.  Caitta  Dharmas,  or  mental  qualities, 
corresponding  to  the  Samskara  Skandha  of  the 
South.  This  has  46  divisions,  classified  in  the 
following  way  : — 10  Mahabhumika  Dharmas^  or 
neutral  elements  which  are  always  present  in 
consciousness,  (1)  Vedana  or  Sensation,  (2) 
Samjiia  or  Conception,  (3)  Cetana  or  motive,  (4) 
Sparca  or  contact,  (5)  Chanda  or  Conation,  (6) 
Mati  or  intellect,  (7)  Smriti  or  memory,  (8) 
Manaskara  or  attention,  (9)  Adhimok^a  or 
determination,  and  (10)  Samadhi  or  contempla- 
tion. Next  follow  the  10  Eugala  mahdb- 
humilcd  dharmas  or  good  elements  which  are 
always  present,  (1)  ^raddha  or  faith,  (2)  Virya 
or  diligence,  (3)  Upek§a  or  indifference,  (4) 
Hri  or  shame,  (5)  Apatrapa  or  modesty,  (6) 
Alobha  or  noncovetousness,  (7)  Adve§a  or  non- 
hatred,  (8)  Ahimsa  or  harmlessness,  (9)  Pra. 
gabdhi  or  serenity  and  (10)  Apramada,  tem- 
perance  or   non-slackness.    Next   come   the   6 

K 


140   INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

Klega  maliabliumika  dJiarmas,  or  great  evil 
elements,  (1)  Moha  or  nescience,  (2)  Pramada 
intemperateness  or  carelessness,  (3)  Kausidya 
or  indolence,  (4)  Agraddha  or  disbelief,  (5) 
Styana  or  idleness,  and  (6)  Andhatya  or  rash- 
ness, Next  come  the  2  ATcugala  mahabhumikd 
dharmas  or  non- virtuous  great  elements,  (1) 
Ahrikya  shamelessness,  and  (2)  Anapatrapa 
or  immodesty.  Next  come  the  10  UpaTcle- 
gabJiumika  dharmas  or  the  lesser  evil  elements 
so  called  because  they  are  not  present  in  all 
forms  of  sentiency,  but  only  in  those  forms  of 
life  which  are  possessed  of  self-consciousness. 
These  are  (1)  Krodha,  or  wrath,  (2)  Mrak§a  or 
hypocrisy,  (3)  Matsarya  or  envy,  (4)  Ir§ya 
or  jealousy,  (5)  Paritapa  or  anguish,  (6)  Vihimsa 
or  injury,  (7)  Upanaha  or  rancour,  (8)  Maya  or 
deceit,  (9)  Qathya  or  trickery,  and  (10)  Mada  or 
arrogance.  Finally  there  are  the  8  Aniya- 
tabhumika  dharmas  or  the  miscellaneous  minor 
mental  qualities,  which  are  (1)  Kaukritya  or 
repentance,  (2)  Middha  or  torpor,  (3)  Vitarka  or 
judgment,  (4)  Vicara  or  investigation,  (5)  Raga 
or  cupidity,  (6)  Pratigha  or  anger,  (7)  Mana  or 
pride,  and  (8)  Vicikitsa  or  doubt. 

4.     Citta    ViprayuTcta    Dharmas    or    miscell- 
aneous elements,  14  in  number,  viz  : — (1)  Prapti 


PSYCHOLOGY  141 

or  attainment,  (2)  Aprapti  or  non-attainment, 
(3)  Sabhagata  or  general  characteristics,  (4) 
Asamjiiika  or  unconsciousness,  (5)  Asamjni- 
samapatti  or  ecstacy  with  the  loss  of  conscious- 
ness, (6)  Nirodha-samapatti  or  a  continuation 
of  the  above  equivalent  to  the  cessation  of 
existence,  (7)  Jivita  or  life,  (8)  Jati  birth  or 
origin,  (9)  Sthiti  or  continuance,  (10)  Jara  or 
decay,  (11)  Anityata  or  impermanency,  (12) 
Namakaya  or  words,  (13)  Padakaya  or  sentence, 
(14)   Vyanjanakaya   or   letters. 

The  subjective  and  objective  classifications 
are  supposed  to  be  equivalent  one  to  another, 
to  be  but  different  ways  of  enumerating  the 
same   phenomena. 

In  the  later  schools,  such  as  the  Satyasiddhi 
sect  with  its  84  Dharmas,  and  the  Yogacarya  sect 
with  its  100  Dharmas,  the  essential  relation- 
ship between  the  subjective  and  objective 
classifications  is  not  changed  though  the  onto- 
logical  background  was  radically  modified.  In 
the  Satyasiddhi  and  Madhyamika  schools  the 
dharmas,  the  skandhas,  and  the  component 
parts  of  the  skandhas  are  themselves  all  im- 
permanent, complex  and  reducible  to  finer 
sub-divisions  ad  infinitum.  In  the  YogacSrya 
school   the   whole  of  life  was   reduced   to   the 


142    INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

stream  of  life,  and  all  the  dharmas  are  but 
vortices  or  centres  in  this  universal  substance. 
All  the  phenomena  of  life  including  the  Dharmas 
are  but  mental  ejects  or  objectivizations  of 
various  aspects  of  the  essence  of  mind.  This 
point  brings  up  the  question  of  the  nature  of 
Vijnana  or  consciousness  and  the  part  which  it 
plays  in  the  appearance  of  the  external  universe. 
The  Abhidharma  Ko^a  knows  nothing  of  the 
89  divisions  of  Vijnana  taught  in  the  Pali  tradi- 
tion, but  only  the  six-fold  aspects  of  conscious- 
ness. The  first  five  of  these,  it  will  be  remem- 
bered, correspond  to  the  five  sense  organs  and 
sense  objects.  The  last  or  Mano vijnana  may 
be  called  the  faculty  of  ratiocination  which 
produces  thought  and  reason  from  the  data 
received  from  the  purely  passive  five  vijnana. 

II.  The  Nature  of  Perceptio  n. 
The  Abhidharma  Koga  is  realistic.  It  believes 
that  there  is  an  external  universe  closely  corres- 
ponding to  the  sense  data  which  we  experience, 
but  it  realises  that  in  its  present  form  the  world 
as  we  see  it  is  subjective,  the  result  of  the 
action  of  the  percipient  consciousness  (vijnana) 
acted  upon  by  external  stimuli. 

Accordingly,  from  the  individual  point  of  view, 
the  origin  of  the  experienced  universe,  as  opposed 


PSYCHOLOGY  143 

to  the  Universe  in  itself — to  use  Kantain  phrase- 
ology is  as  follows  : — 

The  Five  Sense  Objects.     The  Five  Sense  Organs. 
Vedana  (sensation  or  perception.) 
Vijnana  (self  consciousness.) 
Samjna  (consciousness  of  the  external 

universe.) 
Samskara    (the    fully    developed    world    of 
subject  and  object,  life  and  death.) 

We  see  from  this  that  the  Sarvastivadin 
school  of  Hinayana  teaches  a  philosophic  as 
opposed  to  a  crude  realism.  Necessarily,  the 
world  as  we  see  it  is  subjective,  even  though  it 
is  based  on  an  external  reality.  Being  Hinayana, 
and  therefore  more  in  accordance  with  the 
primitive  Buddhism,  no  attempt  is  made  to 
elucidate  the  real  nature  of  the  external  universe 
or  to  premise  its  origin  or  end,  but  with  the  uni- 
verse as  perceived  it  is  closely  concerned.  We  are 
told  how  it  came  into  existence  and  how  it 
will  come  to  an  end  when  Parinirvana,  final 
emancipation,  is  achieved. 

The  epistemology,  ontology,  and  phenomen- 
ology latent  in  this  system  should  be  carefully 
thought  out  before  we  pass  to  the  Yogacarya 
system,  since  the  latter,  though  antithetical, 
is  yet  derived  from  the  earlier  teaching.     In  the 


144   INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

Yogacarya  school  there  are  eight  forms  of 
consciousness  or  Vijnana  postulated.  The 
first  six  are  more  or  less  in  accord  with  the  six 
vijnana  of  the  Hlnayana  doctrine,  save  that  the 
Mano-vijnana  or  the  Abhidharma  Ko^a  is 
divided  into  two,  Mano-vijhana  proper  or  normal 
waking  consciousness,  and  Kligto-mano- 
vijnana  which  is  more  subjective,  and  corresponds 
to  self-awareness.  The  eighth  Vijiiana,  Alaya 
Vijiiana,  or  receptacle  consciousness,  so  called 
because  it  contains  the  seed  of  all  things,  is,  as 
we  have  said,  like  the  Unconscious  of  Von- 
Hartmann,  the  sea  of  life  from  which  both 
subject  and  object  are  derived,  for  it  is  at  once 
that  which  sees  and  that  which  is  seen. 

The  Alaya  Vijiiana  has  four  aspects  or  faculties 
viz  : — 


I. 

Form 

Outer  or  Objective. 

2. 

Perception 

3. 

Batiocination 

Inner  or  Subjective 

4. 

Eeflection. 

In  Hinayana  the  external  world  is  taken  for 
granted  and  we  start  with  the  percipient  con- 
sciousness fully  developed.  In  the  Yogacarya 
school,  we  are  told  that  both  the  external 
world  and  consciousness  are  ultimately  reducible 
to    the    Alaya    Vijnana.     The    Alaya    Vijnana 


PSYCHOLOGY  145 

in  its  as  yet  non-dividuated  phase  is  the  energy 
behind  inanimate  life,  the  world  of  minerals, 
etc.  It  is  also  the  life  force  behind  life  in  the 
vegetable  world.  As  such  it  is  the  Form  or  the 
essence   of  the   objective  world. 

Eventually  this  life  force  attains  the  power  of 
sensation  and  percipiency  It  is  latent  in  the 
vegetable  world  and  is  fully  developed  in  the 
animal  world.  It  becomes  aware  of  the  other 
currents  in  the  stream  of  life,  or,  if  you  prefer, 
the  other  phases  of  the  Alaya  Vijnana,  from 
which  we  understand  why  it  is  said  that  it  is 
both  subject  and  object. 

As  this  sensatory  or  perceptive  faculty  de- 
velops, there  arises  the  ability  to  retain  impress- 
ions, to  compare  and  associate  them,  and  so  the 
third  faculty,  thought  or  normal  consciousness 
comes  into  being.  This  is  to  be  found  only  in 
the  higher  animals  and  in  man,  etc.  This  in 
turn  develops  into  self-consciousness  or  re- 
flection, the  fourth  faculty  only  to  be  found 
in  the  highest  order  of  sentient  beings. 

This  may  be  called  the  cosmic  evolution  of 
the  Alaya  Vijnana,  or  the  evolution  of  the 
Universe  in  itself,  or  the  universe  as  it  really  is, 
as  compared  with  the  experienced  universe, 
which  each  person  creates  for  himself. 


146  INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

As  regards  the  latter  we  are  told  that  the 
stages  in  the  formation  of  the  microcosm  are 
as   follows  : — 

1.  The  Alaya  Vijhana  gives  rise  to  the 
Seed  Alaya  proper — the  basis  of  consciousness — 
and  to  the  sense  organs,  and  the  sense  objects  or 
the  external  world.  The  actual  world  has  thus 
already  been  created,  but  its  replica  has  not 
yet  been  created  by  the  mind.  This  is  the  stage 
at  which  Hinayana  begins.  From  the  inter- 
action of  these  three  there  comes  into  being  the 
essence  of  the  world  as  perceived,  the  basis 
of  the  empirical  world. 

In  the  meanwhile  the  seventh  Vijnana,  the 
Kli^to-mano-Vijiiana,  or  self-consciousness, 
that  which  firmly  distinguishes  between  subject 
and  object,  having  developed,  it  is  fecundated 
by  the  Seed  Alaya,  and  becoming  aware  of  the 
external  universe,  proceeds  to  take  it  into  its 
comprehension  and  so  gives  to  it  form  and  shape, 
which  are,  needless  to  say,  secondary  or  sub- 
jective qualities,  and  not  inherent  in  the  real 
external  world. 

2.  The  sixth  Vijnana,  Mano- vijnana,  I^ormal 
Consciousness,  or  the  faculty  which  discriminates 
between  the  various  phenomena  of  the  universe 
is  then  developed  and,  fecundated  by  the  Seed 


PSYCHOLOGY  147 

Alaya,  adds  to  the  gradually  evolving  germ  the 
concept  of  like  and  dislike  associating  with  it 
other  objects  in  terms  of  cause  and  effect,  etc. 

3.  There  then  develop  the  remaining  five 
forms  of  consciousness  corresponding  to  the  five 
sense  organs.     These  are  : — 

1.  Calcsu    Vijndna,    visual    consciousness, 

mental  action  depend- 
ent on  the  eye,  etc. 

2.  (Jrotra  Vijndna,  oral  consciousness. 

3.  Ghrdna  Vijndna,  nasal  consciousness. 

4.  Jihvd  Vijnand,     cognition    of    objects 

of  taste. 

5.  Kay  a  Vijndna,      cognition  of  the  objects 

of  touch. 

When  these  are  developed  and  impregnated 
by  the  Seed  Alaya  which  may  be  called  the  seed 
of  personality,  they  give,  on  coming  into  contact 
with  the  germ  of  objectivity  the  final  touches 
of  the  experienced  world.  Thus,  for  example, 
the  first  vijnana  or  Visual  Consciousness,  gives 
the  sense  of  colour,  and  presents  the 
phenomenon  in  question  in  the  form  which  our 
ordinary  sense  impressions  make  familiar  to  us. 

By  means  of  the  interaction  of  these  various 
Vijnana,  a  man  builds  up  for  himself  the  external 
world  which  he  experiences.  The  absence  of 
any  of  them  would  destroy  the  completeness. 


148  INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

Without  the  first  Vijnana  he  could  not  see, 
without  the  sixth  he  could  not  understand 
the  relative  value  of  the  various  phenomena 
presented  to  him.  Without  the  seventh  he 
could  not  formulate  a  conception  of  shape  or 
size,  while  without  the  eighth  neither  he  nor  the 
external  object  could  exist. 

One  last  word  concerning  certain  details.  The 
eighth  Vijfiana  is  the  root  or  essence  of  all  things 
80  that  all  other  seven  Vijnanas  are  derived 
from  it.  The  Seventh  and  Eighth  Vijnana  are 
closely  associated  and  so  maintain  a  direct  and 
immediate  relationship.  The  sixth  Vijnana  serves 
to  co-ordinate  the  remaining  five.  Among  the 
ignorant  and  the  unenlightened  the  sixth 
Vijnana  or  normal  consciousness  is  aware  of  the 
existence  of  only  the  seventh  Vijnana.  This 
they  suppose  to  be  their  real  selves  and  to  be  an 
eternal  and  unchanging  reality.  Bodhisattvas 
are  able  to  see  the  true  state  of  affairs.  They 
are  able  to  penetrate  to  the  core  of  the  seventh 
Vijnana,  and  thus  come  into  contact  with  the 
eighth  or  Alaya  Vijnana  the  ever  fluid  medium 
which  is  the  true  cause  of  all  existence. 

'-' 7  ^h  1a  \  ^^  ( Cone/' f/ on) 

ne£xferna/(<i .UL /f^  #:^~^/7^  J    - 


PSYCHOLOGY  149 

Buddhism  distinguishes  two  elements  in 
causality,  the  In  (hetu)  the  seed  or  cause 
proper,  the  En  (pratyaya)  environment  or 
attendant  circumstances,  and  the  Ka  (phala)  or 
the  result  or  fruit.  Thus  for  instance  a  mango 
seed  is  planted,  the  sun,  rain,  and  the  earth  act 
upon  it,  and  a  mango  tree  springs  up,  the  mango 
seed  is  the  In,  the  sun,  rain,  and  earth  are  the 
JE7w,  and  the  mango  fruit  the  Ka. 

From  the  epistemological  point  of  view,  says 
the  Togacarya  school,  in  the  origin  of  the 
experienced  world,  the  sixth  Vijnana  is  the  seed, 
the  seventh  and  eighth  Vijnana  the  condition, 
and  the  experienced  world  the  fruit.  This, 
of  course,  is  obvious.  That  which  really  formu- 
lates the  eject  of  externality  is  the  normal 
waking  consciousness,  though  this  is  based  upon 
the  discriminating  faculty  of  the  seventh  Vij- 
nana, and  the  essence  of  mind  as  expressed  in 
the  Alaya  Vijnana. 

III.      Immortality. 

Finally  the  question  of  the  survival  of  the 
personality  must  be  examined.  Having  no 
fixed  unchanging  atman,  Buddhist  immortality 
is  somewhat  different  from  that  taught  in  other 
religions,  yet  actually  the  difference  in  outlook 
is  less  than  might  be  supposed.     The  personality 


150   INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA     BUDDHISM 


as  a  complex  and  changing  organism  persists 
from  year  to  year.  The  component  parts  vary 
in  each  incarnation,  there  is  no  underlying 
substance  which  is  retained  throughout,  yet 
there  is  a  Karmaic  connection  which  allows  us 
to  say  that  it  is  the  same  personality. 

If  the  deeds  in  this  life  have  been  evil,  at  the 
the  moment  of  death  a  new  personality  (which 
is  yet  the  same)  will  be  formed  in  one  of  the  hells; 
if  a  man  has  been  virtuous  he  will  be  reborn  in 
one  of  the  heavens,  or,  according  to  his  Karma 
in  one  of  the  other  realms,  possibly  as  a  man 
again. 

This  idea,  common  to  all  forms  of  Buddhism, 
the  Yogacarya  school  expresses  in  the  following 
way  :— 

/^reje^/^  Pas/ 


C 


r^ 


8:1///. 


'nana 


f     7 .  l//J/7ana     V 


(      6  ^  yiynancf    \ 


(     /_  l^///73na 
(      6  -  I////?  3 /7  a 


Wor/c//e/  Ojffa/rj 


PSYCHOLOGY  151 

The  state  of  the  sixth  Vijnana  at  the  moment 
of  death,  moulds  from  the  plastic  mind  substance 
a  new  sixth  Vijnana,  and  the  same  is  true  of 
the  seventh  and  eighth  Vijnanas.  The  con- 
dition or  stage  of  development  of  the  new  eighth 
Vijiiana  is  supposed  to  be  greatly  affected  by 
the  activity  of  the  sixth  Vijnana  during  the 
previous  existence,  which  in  turn  is  strongly 
influenced  by  the  external  conditions  and 
previous  observance  of  the  various  moral  com- 
mandments. 

The  new  Vijiianas  having  thus  come  into 
existence,  the  creation  of  the  new  experienced 
universe  goes  on  as  before.  In  this  way  the 
wheel  of  life  and  death  continues  for  ever,  or 
until  Nirvana  be  gained. 

It  should  be  observed  that  in  both  the  heavens 
and  the  hells,  man  does  not  exist  as  a  dis- 
embodied spirit  as  is  presumably  taught  in 
Christianity,  but  that  he  has  a  body  with  the  usual 
sense  objects  and  sense  organs,  etc.  (the  only 
exception  to  this  are  the  Artipa  Heavens,  where 
there  is,  of  course,  no  form)  correlated  to  the 
eighth  Vijnana,  so  that  the  chart  for  the  method 
of  re-birth  and  the  method  of  the  creation  of 
the  experienced  universe  applies  to  the  super- 
natural as  well  as  to  the  physical  worlds. 


152    INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

Finally,  it  should  be  added,  that  just  as  the 
later  Mahayanist  philosophers  considered  these 
supernatural  worlds  to  be  purely  subjective, 
/so  did  they  come  to  think  that  reincarnation  was 
'  general  rather  than  particular,  that  there  was  no 
specific  survival  of  each  personality,  but  that 
the  stream  of  life  seen  in  the  development  of 
the  human  race  alone  survived,  that  each  person 
added  his  quota  to  the  general  stream,  and  that 
the  individual  Karma  was  added  to  the  Universal 
Karma  which  conditions  the  life  of  future 
generations.  This  idea  has  been  especially 
emphasized  by  the  Dhyana  sect. 


CHAPTEE  VI 

THE  WHEEL  OF  LIFE    AND    THE    BOAD 
TO    NIRVANA 

Whether  taken  as  objective  realities  or  symbols 
of  subjective  states,  great  emphasis  has  been 
laid  upon  the  various  gati  or  realms  of  existence 
in  which  men  are  for  ever  being  born  and  die. 
The  gati  are  frequently  symbolized  by  a  wheel 
of  life,  a  symbol  which  is  common  to  all  forms 
of  Buddhism.  A  few  words  of  explanation  con- 
cerning a  typical  chart,  such  a  chart  as  the 
Lama  elucidated  to  Kim,  will  perhaps  be  found 
useful. 

(a.)  At  the  centre  are  the  three  animals 
symbolic  of  the  three  fundamental  sins  which 
result  in  the  formation  of  the  phenomenal 
world.  These  are  the  serpent  (anger),  the  boar 
(ignorance),  and  the  dove  (lust).  They  are 
catching  one  another  by  the  tail  and  so  typify 
the  train  of  sins  which  produces  the  wheel  of 
life.  In  most  Chinese  and  Japanese  representa- 
tions of  the  wheel  the  Buddha  is  placed  in  the 


154    INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

middle  to  show  that  in  spite  of  the  evil  of  existence 
the  Universal  Buddha  is  latent  in  all.  In  the 
Tibetan  chart  the  Buddhas  and  Bodhisavattas 
are  placed  outside  showing  that  the  phenomenal 
world  is  regulated  by  and  contained  in  the 
noumenal  world. 

(b.)  In  the  next  circle  are  placed  the  symbols 
of  the  twelve  Nidanas,  or  the  twelve  links  in 
the  chain  of  universal  causality  whereby  all 
things  are  evolved.  The  twelve,  it  will  be 
remembered  are  : — 

1.  Ignorance  represented  by  a  blind  woman. 

2.  Action  represented  by  a  potter  at  work 

or  a  man  gathering  fruit. 

3.  Consciousness  represented  by  a  restless 

monkey. 

4.  Name  and  Form  represented  by  a  boat. 

5.  Sense  Organs  represented  by  a  house. 

6.  Contact  represented  by  a  man  and  woman 

sitting  together. 

7.  Sensation  represented  by  a  man  pierced 

with  an  arrow. 

8.  Desire  represented  by   a  man  drinking 

wine. 

9.  Craving  represented  by  a  couple  in  union. 
10.  Birth  represented  by  child  birth. 


THE    WHEEL   OF  LIFE  155 

11.  Life  represented  by   a   man   carrying   a 

a  corpse. 

12.  Disease,  old  age,  and  death,  represented 

by   an   old   woman   leaning   on   a 

stick. 
These  twelve  nidanas  have  played  an  im- 
portant part  in  Buddhist  phenomenology  and 
have   been   carefully   explained  in   various 
works  on  all  forms  of  Buddhism. 

(c.)  The  next  circle  typifies  the  whole  body  of 
sentient  beings  including  the  inhabitants  of  all 
the  six  realms  though  here  represented  in  human 
form.  This  is  divided  into  two  parts,  Sugati 
(on  the  left)  the  state  of  happiness,  and  Durgati 
(on  the  right)  the  state  of  misery. 

Sentient  beings  however,  never  exist  in  a  pure 
or  unembodied  form  but  are  inhabitants  of  one  of 
the  six  realms  shewn  in  the  six  sections  of  the 
outer  circle,  or  for  a  short  time  in  Bardo  or 
intermediate  state  between  death  and  rebirth. 

In  this  arrangement,  the  first  gati  is  the 
realm  of  human  beings,  for  though  in  pleasure  and 
duration  of  life  it  is  far  inferior  to  the  Devalokas 
or  Abodes  of  the  Gods  or  the  Etipa  or  Arupa 
Heavens,  it  is  here  alone  that  progress  in  the 
path  of  the  Bodhisattva  may  be  made.  For  this 
reason    rebirth    as    a    human    being    is    highly 

L 


156    INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

prized  and  is  considered  difificult  to  achieve. 
In  the  Tibetan  chart  we  see  a  woman  on  account 
of  merit  in  a  past  life  being  reborn  as  a  monk 
who  will  in  due  course  attain  Nirvana.  Im- 
mediately above  him  are  two  Lamas  or  monks 
of  the  exoteric  school.  The  four  armed  deity- 
is  Avalokite9vara  the  symbol  of  Universal 
Love  or  Mercy,  leading  men  to  emancipation. 
On  either  side  are  two  Bodhisattvas  who  by 
following  the  esoteric  school  are  soon  to  attain 
Buddhahood.  The  other  figures  represent 
various  aspects  of  human  life. 

The  second  gati  is  the  realm  of  the  devas  or 
Gods  in  which  are  also  included  the  inhabitants 
of  the  eighteen  heavens  of  the  World  of  Form  and 
the  four  heavens  of  the  World  of  Formlessness. 
Here  the  meritorious  are  born  to  enjoy  the  fruits 
of  their  good  Karma.  It  is  a  place  of  enjoyment 
but  not  of  culture  and  progress  in  the  way  of 
Bodhisattva  perfection. 

The  third  gati  portrays  the  realm  of  the 
Aeuras  the  Demons  or  Genii  the  ancient  enemies 
of  the  Devas.  The  fourth  is  the  realm  of  the 
animals,  the  fifth  is  the  realm  of  the  Pretas, 
the  hungry  ghosts  or  the  ghouls,  the  sixth  is  the 
underworld,  where  are  situate  the  Narakas  or 
HeUs. 


THE    WHEEL   OF  LIFE 


157 


The  other  kinds  of  supernatural  beings  of 
which  Buddhism  speaks  have  no  separate  realm 
of  their  own  but  are  distributed  among  the  six 
gati,  while  in  some  accounts  there  are  only  five, 
the  Asuras  being  grouped  with  the  Devas.  It 
should  also  be  noted  that  no  account  is  taken 
of  the  vegetable  world.  Contrary  to  the  teach- 
ing of  certain  Hindu  schools  Buddhism  does  not 
consider  that  vegetables  belong  to  the  world 
of  sentient  beings,  so  that  it  is  impossible  to  be 
reborn  in  that  state. 

These   realms    are    sufficiently    important    to 
require  slightly  more  detailed  consideration, 
(a.)     The  World  of  the  Gods. 

This  includes  the  four  Arupa  or  formless 
heavens,  the  eighteen,  (or  16)  Heavens  of  Form 
or  Eupa  or  Brahma  Heavens,  as  well  as  the  six 
Deva  heavens  of  the  World  of  Desire.  The 
duration  of  life  as  well  as  the  average  stature,  etc., 
of  the  inhabitants  of  these  heavens  is  as  follows  : 

Average 


Name  of  Heaven.     Duration  of  life. 


Ist  Devaloka 
2nd  Devaloka 
3rd  Devaloka 
4th  Devaloka 


9  million  years. 
36 
144 
576 


5th  Devaloka  2,304 
6th  Devaloka  9,216 


Stature. 
^  Kro§a 

f 

u  „ 


>> 


)> 


158    INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

Name  of  Heaven.    Duration  of  life.       gtature. 
1st  Kupaloka  I  mahakalpa        \  yojana. 

2nd  Etipaloka          \            „  1     j> 

3rd  Eupalaka          1             „  li  m 

4th  Rupaloka          2             „  2     ,, 

5th  Rnpaloka          4             ,,  4     ,, 

6th  Rupaloka          8             ,,  8     ,, 

7th  Eupaloka        16             ,,  16     ,, 

8th  Rupaloka        32             „  32     ,, 

9th  Rupaloka        64             „  64     „ 

10th  Rupaloka      125             „  125     „ 

11th  Rupaloka      250             „  250     „ 

12th  Rupaloka      500             „  500     „ 

13th  Rupaloka      500             „  500     „ 

14th  Rupaloka    1,000            „  1,000     „ 

15th  Rupaloka    2,000            „  2,000    „ 

16th  Rupaloka    4,000             „  4,000    „ 

17th  Rupaloka    8,000            „  8,000    „ 

18th  Rupaloka  16,000            „  16,000    „ 
1st   Arupaloka  20,000  mahakalpas.  \ 
2nd  Arupaloka  40,000           „ 
3rd  Arupaloka  60,000          „ 
4th  Ariipaloka  80,000           „ 

(b.)    The    World    of  Men. 

Men  are  to  be  found  in  all  the  innumerable 

Cakravala    (worlds)    scattered  throughout    the 


The  inhabitants 
of  the  Arupa- 
lokas  have  no 
bodies. 


THE   WHEEL   OF   LIFE  159 

universe.  In  each  Cakravala  there  are  four 
continents  one  lying  on  each  side  (North,  South, 
East,  and  West)  of  the  great  central  mountain 
and  the  seven  rocky  circles. 

1.  In  the  Northern  continent  called  Uttara- 
kuru  the  inhabitants  live  for  a  thousand  years, 
none  die  young  and  there  is  no  pain,  yet  owing 
to  the  difficulty  of  treading  the  Holy  Path  there 
it  is  called  one  of  the  evil  places. 

2.  In  the  Western  continent  called  Apara- 
godaniya  the  inhabitants  live  for  five  hundred 
years,  but  some  die  younger,  and  anxiety  is 
sometimes  experienced. 

3.  In  the  Eastern  continent  called  Pur- 
vavideha  the  inhabitants  live  for  two  hundred 
and  fifty  years  or  less.  Here  also  is  there 
sorrow  and  anxiety. 

4.  In  the  Southern  continent  which  includes 
all  the  known  worlds  and  is  called  Jambudvipa, 
the  age  of  the  inhabitants,  varies  from  ten  years 
to  an  asamkeya.  From  the  purely  hedonistic 
point  of  view  it  is  inferior  to  the  other  continents; 
but  it  is  the  best  place  to  train  for  Bodhisattva- 
hood. 

"  Among  the  beings  of  the  three  worlds 
(Kama,  Eupa,  and  Ariipa  Eealms)  men  are  more 


160    INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

full  of  thought  than  the  others.     Therefore  is 
human  existence  to  be  sought." 

(c.)     The  World  of  Asuras. 

The  Asuras  are  semi-divine  demons  who  are 
usually  credited  with  the  power  of  transformation. 
We  find  it  frequently  stated  that  though  the 
Asuras  have  much  in  common  with  the  Devas 
occasionally  there  is  conflict  between  the  two 
classes  in  which  the  Asuras  are  always  eventually 
beaten.  The  story  of  this  conflict  is  very  ancient 
and  can  be  traced  to  pre-vedic  days  when  the 
Aryans  had  not  yet  reached  India.  In  Persia 
the  Ahuras  (Asuras)  are  the  conquerors  and  the 
Devas  are  the  evil  beings,  in  direct  contrast 
to  the  Indian  conception.  Many  Chinese 
Buddhists  divide  the  Asuras  into  four  classes, 
viz.,  1.  Animal  Asuras,  whose  abode  is  in  the 
depth  of  the  ocean  and  deep  sea  caverns.  2. 
Preta  Asuras,  who  are  very  much  like  the  ordinary 
Pretas  or  Ghouls  but  are  of  a  somewhat  higher 
order  and  are  endowed  with  certain  fundamental 
virtues  and  powers.  3.  Human  Asuras,  who 
have  fallen  from  virtue  in  Heaven  and  reside 
near  the  sun  and  moon.  4.  Deva  Asuras,  the 
divine  asuras  who  resemble  and  are  but  little 
below  the  dignity  of  the  Gods  (Devas)  them- 
selves. 


THE    WHEEL   OF  LIFE  161 

(d.)  The  World  of  Animals. 
In  Nan  jo  we  have  the  following  description 
of  the  animal  kingdom  :** — "  There  are  insects 
whether  flying  quickly  or  moving  slowly,  such  as 
wasps  and  caterpillars,  there  are  animals  of  the 
scaly  tribe,  and  those  covered  with  shells  or 
crusts.  There  are  some  animals  which  are 
covered  with  hair  or  naked.  Some  are  one  horned 
and  others  are  two  horned.  Some  are  two- 
footed  and  some  are  many  footed.  Some  have 
wings  with  which  they  fly  and  others  have  talons 
with  which  they  seize  their  prey.  There  are 
large  animals  called  whales  ;  the  ferocious  are 
tigers  and  wolves  ;  the  poisonous  are  vipers 
and  water  bugs  ;  and  the  cunning  are  foxes 
and  badgers  ;  there  are  horned  owls  which  eat 
their  mothers.  There  are  some  animals  called 
owl  cats  which  eat  their  fathers.  There  are 
several  different  kinds  of  animals  of  which  the 
weaker  is  always  injured  by  the  stronger.  Such 
is  the  state  of  beings  who  have  entered  into  the 
nature  of  animals."     (Page  VIII). 

(e.)     The  World  of  Pretas. 

Those  who  are  born  as  Pretas  or  hungry  ghosts 

undergo   great   suffering.     Some   have   "  bellies 

as  large  as  a  hill  while  their  mouths  are  as  small 

as  the  eye  of  a  needle,  so  that  they  can  neither 

**  12  Sects  of  Japanese  Buddhism. 


162    INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

eat  nor  drink.  There  are  Pretas  for  whom 
water  is  always  changed  into  fire  as  soon  as  they 
desire  to  drink,  so  that  they  can  never  satisfy 
their  thirst.  There  are  Pretas  who  eat  nothing 
but  excrement  and  decaying  matter.  There 
are  Pretas  whose  bodies  are  pierced  with  their 
own  hairs,  the  points  of  which  are  as  sharp  as 
swords.  Again  there  are  Pretas  who  eat  their 
own  children.  This  state  is  not  seen  by  human 
eyes  but  among  mankind  there  is  often  seen 
something  like  the  above."     (Nanjo). 

(f.)     The    Ndrakas    or   Hells. 

In  contradistinction  to  the  one  hell  of  Chris- 
tianity, Buddhism  postulates  the  existence  of 
innumerable  places  of  torment  though  all  of  a 
temporary  nature.  The  most  important  are  the 
eight  hot  hells  and  the  eight  cold  hells.  These 
are  : — 

A.  Hot  Hells.  (1)  Samjiva,  (2)  Kalasutra, 
(3)  Samghata,  (4)  Kaurava,  (5)  Maharaurava, 
(5)  Tapana,  (7)  Mahatapana,  (8)  Avici. 

B.  Cold  Hells.  (1)  Arbuda,  (2)  Nirarbuda, 
(3)  Atata,  (4)  Hahava,  (5)  Huhuva,  (6)  Utpala, 
(7)  Padma,  (8)  Mahapadma. 

Owing  to  the  action  of  Karma  man  continues 
to  be  reborn  in  these  realms  until  at  length  he 
succeeds  in  destroying  ignorance,  anger,  and  lust, 


THE   WHEEL   OF  LIFE  163 

after  which  there  is  no  cause  for  the  creation  of 
the  perceptual  or  experienced  world  and  thus 
Nirvana  is  attained. 

All  schools  of  Buddhism  have  placed  much 
emphasis  upon  the  Eoads  to  Buddhahood  and 
the  necessary  stages  which  must  be  passed. 
In  the  Chinese  work  entitled  Esuan  Fo  P^u 
(Senbtippu)  translated  by  Timothy  Richards  as 
"  A  Guide  to  Buddhahood "  we  find  a  very 
systematic  presentation  of  the  usual  ideas  on 
the  subject,  more  particularly  from  the  point 
of  view  of  the  T'  ien  t  'ai  or  Tendai  school. 

In  this  work  the  stages  to  be  passed  are 
arranged  in  three  classes.  The  first  is  pre- 
liminary, and  is  subdivided  : — 

1.  Steps  in  the  departure  from  evil. 

2.  Steps  in  the  imperfect  religious  life. 

3.  Steps  in  doing  good  and  suppressing  evil. 
When  this  stage  has  been  reached  the  disciple 

definitely  enters  upon  the  path  which  leads  to 
Buddhahood.  This  involves  training  in  the 
three  practises  common  to  all  forms  of  Buddhism. 
These  are  : — 

1.  Steps  in  the  growth  of  (Jila  (Kal)  dis- 
cipline, or  moral  law  which  is  summed  up  in 
the  various  commandments  and  rules  and  regu- 
lations of  the  Buddhist  order. 


164    INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

2.  Steps  in  the  growth  of  Samddhi  (JO) 
contemplation,  meditation,  or  ecstacy. 

3.  Steps  in  the  growth  of  Prajnd  (E)  or 
wisdom. 

Up  to  this  point  the  path  has  been  the  same 
for  all  disciples.  But  from  hereon  the  aspirant 
chooses  one  of  the  four  paths  or  schools  into 
which  the  Tendai  sect  divides  all  aspects  of 
Buddhism.     These    are  : — 

1.  Steps  in  the  Pitaka  or  Z6  school,  the 
original  Hinayana  doctrine. 

2.  Steps  in  the  Intermediate  or  Tsu  school, 
the  undeveloped  Mahayana  doctrine. 

3.  Steps  in  the  Differentiated  or  Betsu 
school,  represented  by  the  Avatamsaka  or  Kegon 
sect. 

4.  Steps  in  the  Perfect  or  En  school  re- 
presented by  the  Tendai  sect  itself. 

All  these  four  schools  belong  to  the  Shodomon 
or  Aryamarga  school  of  Buddhism.  In  addition 
there  are  the  stages  in  the  Jodomon  or  Suk- 
havati  school  whereby  one  attains  to  Nirvana 
by  entering  into  the  land  of  Bliss  of  Amitabha. 

Though  seemingly  of  little  other  than  purely 
technical  importance  the  great  emphasis  laid 
upon  these  matters  necessitates  our  examining 
the  details  of  each  one  of  the  foregoing  steps. 


THE   WHEEL  OF   LIFE  165 

I.     Preliminary  Stages. 

A.  Steps  in  the  Departure  of  Evil.  These 
consist  of  twenty-one  steps  which  may  be 
classified  into  seven  groups,  viz  : — 

I.  1.  The  Ten  worst  crimes  ;  2,  the  Ten 
intermediary  crimes  ;  3,  the  Ten  lighter  crimes. 
These  three  stages  all  consist  of  breaking  to  a 
greater  or  lesser  degree  the  ten  Buddhist  com- 
mandments which  are :  1,  not  to  kill ;  2,  not  to 
steal ;  3,  not  to  commit  adultery  ;  4,  not  to  lie ; 

5,  not  to  slander ;  6,  not  to  indulge  in  vain 
conversation ;  7,  not  to  covet ;  9,  not  to  bear 
malice  ;  and  10,  not  to  hold  wrong  views. 

II.  4,  Self-will  ;     5,   charity    without    love ; 

6,  convential  virtue  ;    7,  formalism. 

III.  8,  The  ten  lower  worldly  virtues  ;  9, 
the  ten  intermediary  virtues ;  10,  the  ten 
higher  virtues  :  These  three  consist  in  obeying 
the  above  ten  commandments  to  a  greater  or 
less  degree. 

IV.  11.  Indulging  in  superstition  or  false 
views ;    12,  dabbling  in  contemplation. 

V.  13.  Practice  of  the  four  Dhyanas  or  the 
four  stages  of  ecstacy  ;  14,  meditation  on  the 
four  infinite  virtues,  viz.,  love,  pity,  joy,  and  self- 


166    INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

sacrifice ;  15,  meditation  on  the  aspects  of 
immateriality,  corresponding  to  the  four  realms 
of  the  Artipadhatu. 

VI.  16.  Contemplation  of  human  opinion  ; 
17,  practice  of  religion  for  name  and  gain. 

VII.  18.  Transcendental  happiness  ;  19,  the 
transcendental  moral  commandments  (Q)ila). 
These  are  the  precepts  of  the  Buddhist  order. 

20,  Transcendental    contemplation    (Samadhi) ; 

21,  Transcendental  wisdom  (Prajna). 

B.  Steps  in  the  Imperfect  Religious  Life.  He 
who  understood  the  foregoing  steps  has  under- 
stood the  essence  of  Buddhism.  In  attempting 
to  follow  them  however,  he  must  pass  through 
the  following  stages. 

1.  Breaking  of  the  commandments ;  2, 
breaking  of  the  eight  special  commandments 
(see  below)  ;  3,  bringing  the  truth  into  disrepute  ; 
4,  despising  learning ;   5,  Increasing  in  conceit. 

C.  Steps  in  Doing  Good  and  Suppressing 
Evil.  Meanwhile  the  disciple  must  guard  him- 
self against  relapse  into  evil  ways  and  seek  to 
establish  himself  in  the  Holy  Path  by  : — 

1.  Causing  all  sentient  beings  to  hear  the 
doctrine  of  the  Buddhas  ;  2,  by  protecting  the 
Dharma  ;  3,  seeking  instruction  in  the  Dharma  ; 


THE   WHEEL   OF  LIFE  167 

4,  mutual  confession  of  sin  ;  6,  confession  of 
sin  to  all  the  Buddhas  ;  6,  stamping  out  the 
need  for   confession. 

II.     Practice   in  the   Three   Sciences. 
A.     Steps  in  the  increase  of  Discipline  ( ^ila). 

1.  The  Five  Commandments  of  the  Layman. 
These  are  1,  not  to  destroy  life  ;  2,  not  to  steal ; 
3,  not  to  commit  adultery ;  4,  not  to  lie ;  5, 
not  to  take  intoxicating  liquors :  These  are 
binding  at  all  times  on  Buddhists. 

2.  The  Eight  Special  Commandments  for 
Laymen.      These  are  the  preceding  five  plus  : — 

1,  not  to  eat  food  at  forbidden  times  ;  2,  not 
to  use  garlands  or  use  perfumes  ;  3,  not  to  sleep 
on  high  or  broad  beds  (chastity).  These  three 
are  not  obligatory  on  laymen  but  are  undertaken 
at  various  times  to  acquire  merit. 

3.  The  Ten  Commandments  of  the  Monlc. 
These  are  the  preceding  eight  plus  : — 1,  to 
abstain  from  music,  singing  and  stage  plays  ; 

2,  to  abstain  from  the  use  of  gold  and  silver 
(money). 

4.  The  Two  Hundred  and  Fifty  Rules  for 
Monies.  These  rules  are  an  epitome  of  the  whole 
vinaya. 


168    INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

5.  The  Secondary  Course  of  Rules  Jor  Monks. 
Those  who  have  successfully  practised  the  two 
hundred  and  fifty  rules  proceed  to  follow  these 
higher  and  more  difficult  precepts. 

6.  The  Complete  Observance  of  all  the  Rules 
of  the  Vinaya.  The  foregoing  constitute  the 
letter  of  the  Law,  the  remainder  constitute  its 
spirit. 

7.  Abiders  in  the  Law.  8.  Peacemakers. 
9.  Those  who  practise  Purity.  10.  Those  who 
practise  superior  Purity.  11.  The  rule  of  con- 
scious Purity.  12.  The  rule  of  unconscious 
Purity.  13.  The  unsurpassed  Law  or  the 
peerless  wisdom  which  pervades  all  the  lesser 
commandments. 

B.  Steps  in  the  Growth  of  Ecstacy  {Samddhi). 
These  consist  in  a  number  of  rules  whereby  a 
peculiar  form  of  ecstatic  meditation  may  be 
induced  in  many  cases  resembling  a  state  of 
trance  or  auto-hypnosis.  Lack  of  space  prevents 
our  more  than  enumerating  the  principal 
stages  : 

1.  Six   transcendental   gates   of   meditation. 

2.  The  sixteen  victories  :  These  consist  for 
the  most  part  of  various  breathing  exercises, 
correlated  to  various  mental  stages. 


THE    WHEEL  OF  LIFE  I69 

3.  Comprehensive  reflection.  Reflection  on 
breathing,  on  matter,  on  mind,  and  on  causation. 

4.  The  ninefold  mental  perceptions.  These 
consist  of  thought  on  the  various  evils  of  cor- 
poreal existence  as  compared  with  the  purity 
of  the  noumenal  world. 

5.  The  eight-fold  mental  perceptions  :  These 
are  called  mental  perceptions  because  one  is 
supposed  to  hold  the  mental  image  vividly 
before  one.  They  are  1,  The  Buddha  ;  2,  The 
Dharma  ;  3,  The  Order  of  the  Monks  ;  4,  The 
Vinaya  ;  5,  Sacrifices  ;  6,  The  various  Heavens  ; 
7,  Sentient  beings  ;    8,  Death. 

6.  The  ten-fold  mental  perceptions.  7.  The 
eight-fold  reflection  on  mortification.  8.  Re- 
flection on  the  eight  victorious  battles.  9. 
Reflection  on  the  ten  Universal  Ideas :  These 
consist  of  various  subjects  for  meditation  while 
the  aspirant  is  engaged  in  attaining  Samadhi. 

10.  Contemplation  on  the  nine  preceeding 
stages  :  As  a  result  of  this  severe  mental  train- 
ing, ecstacy  ensues,  of  which  we  are  given  three 
stages : — 

11.  The  master's  ecstatic  contemplation. 
This  consists  in  eliminating  desire  and  trans- 
cending the  four  Arupa  states. 

12.  Surpassing  ecstacy. 


170    INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

13.  Eoyal  Ecstacy  in  which  innumerable, 
indescribable  joys  are  experienced,  more  especi- 
ally joy  in  transcending  all  twenty-five  stages  of 
existence. 

C.  Stages  in  the  Growth  of  Wisdom  (Prajna). 
By  means  of  samadhi  and  ordinary  forms  of 
reflection  and  contemplation,  wisdom  is  at 
length  achieved.  This  also  consists  of  several 
stages  : — 

1.  Inauguration  of  the  Cravaka  heart,  where- 
by one  understands  the  four  Noble  Truths  and 
is  able  to  attain  Arhatship. 

2.  Inauguration  of  the  Pratyeka  Buddha 
heart,  whereby  one  understands  the  twelve 
Nidanas,  the  chain  of  causation,  and  so  attains 
to  complete  wisdom. 

3.  Inauguration  of  the  Bodhisattva  heart, 
whereby  one  makes  the  four  vows  and  practises 
the  six  paramitas. 

4.  Eeflection  on  ^unyata.  Eecognition 
that  all  phenomena  are  impermanent  and  have 
no  self-essence. 

5.  Eeflection  on  the  three-fold  nature  of 
phenomena,  Kti,  Ke,  and  Chu. 

6.  Transcending  reflection  on  the  Essence 
of  Mind,  which  is  perfect  and  complete  (En) 
and    immediate    (Ton).     The    older    forms    of 


THE    WHEEL  OF  LIFE  171 

Mahayana  would  have  us  stop  here,  but  the  later 
branches  add  two  more  : — 

7.  Desire  to  be  re-born  in  the  inner  mansion 
of  Maitreya.  The  Bodhisattva  who  is  to  be  the 
next  Buddha  to  appear  in  this  world  at  present 
resides  in  the  Tusita  Heaven.  Those  who  have 
high  aims  are  re-born  there  to  garner  wisdom 
of  him. 

8.  Desire  to  be  re-born  in  the  Sukhavati 
of  Amitabha  Buddha. 

III.     Stages  in  the  Four  Schools. 

The  disciple  is  now  able  to  enter  definitely 
some  particular  path  which  leads  to  Nirvana. 
The  Tendai  school  thinks  that  there  are  four 
paths  identified  with  the  four  principal  phases 
of   Buddhism. 

A.     Steps  in  the  PitaJca  or  Zo  School. 

1.  The  five  heart  rests  consisting  of  med- 
itation on  1,  the  evils  of  existence  ;  2, 
compassion  and  transcendality ;  3, 
causality  ;  4,  the  elements  of  existence  ; 
5,  the  methods  of  samadhi. 

2.  Thought   on    differentiation,    or  analysis. 

3.  Thought    on    Totality    or    Synthesis. 

In  practice  these  consist  in  the  application 
of  the  three  or  four  marks  to  the  body 
and  mind. 


172    INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

4.  The  Hot  Zeal  Stage.  5.  The  Mountain 
top  stage.  6.  The  stage  of  perseverance  : 
When  this  stage  has  been  attained,  there 
is  no  return,  no  "  falling  from  grace." 

7.  The  highest  stage  in  the  phenomenal 
world. 

8.  The  Qrotapanna  stage  :  he  has  entered  upon 
the  stream,  the  lowest  of  the  four  supreme 
stages  of  the  Pitaka  school. 

9.  The  Sakridagamin  stage :  he  who  will  be 
reborn  but  once  before  attaining  Nirvana. 

10.  The  Anagamin  stage,  he  who  returns  no 
more  to  the  world  but  being  reborn  in  the 
Arupa  worlds  there  attains  to  Nirvana. 

11.  The  stage  of  Arhatship :  he  who  has 
attained  to  the  state  of  bliss  and  emanci- 
pation from  the  phenomenal  world.  This  is 
the  highest  stage  to  which,  according  to 
the  Pitaka  school,  most  men  can   attain. 

12.  The  stage  of  Pratyeka  Buddha  :  he  who 
forsaking  mere  emancipation  aims  at 
complete  enlightenment  but  for  himself 
alone. 

13-14-15.  Various  degrees  in  the  Bodhisattva 
stage  :  who  have  undertaken  the  four  vowa 


THE  WHEEL  OF  LIFE  173 

and  practice  the  six  paramitas,  working 
through  innumerable  kalpas  for  the  salva- 
tion of  all  mankind. 

16.     Buddhahood. 

B.     Steps  in  the  Intermediate  or  Tsu  School. 

These  consist  of  the  attainment  of  the  follow- 
ing : — 1,  wisdom  ;  2,  spiritual  nature  ;  3, 
eight  forms  of  patience  ;  4,  spiritual  per- 
ception ;  5,  indifference  to  pleasure  and 
pain,  wealth  and  poverty  ;  6,  freedom  from 
desire  ;  7,  finished  work  :  This  is  equi- 
valent to  Arhatship  which  is  the  highest 
goal  of  Hinayana  but  which  is  itself  but  a 
stage  in  the  later  schools  ;  8,  Pratyeka 
Buddhahood.  In  undeveloped  Mahayana 
including  the  Intermediate  school  this  is 
the  highest  stage  to  which  ordinary 
humanity  may  aspire  ;  9,  Bodhisattva- 
hood  ;    10,  Buddhahood. 

C.     Steps  in  the  Differentiated  or  Betsu  School  of 
Mahayana — 52  in  number  : — 

1-10.  The  ten  aims  (literally  the  ten  hearts). 
These  are  1,  faith  ;  2,  thoughtfulness  > 
3,  progress  ;  4,  wisdom  ;  5,  contem- 
plation ;  6,  perseverance ;  7,  protec- 
tion of  the  Dharraa  ;   8,  returning  to  the 


174    INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

source  of  things  ;    9,   Qila,  morality  ;    10, 
the  determination  or  vow  to  save  others. 
11-20.     The  ten  grades. 

1.  The  increase  of  spirituality.  This  is 
equivalent  to  the  stage  of  ^rotapanna. 

2.  Submission   to   rule.     Equivalent   to 

preparation    for    the    Sakridagamin 
stage. 

3.  Cultivation  of  Virtue.  Equivalent  to 
the  attainment  for  the  Sakridagamin 
Stage. 

4.  Noble  birth  =  preparation  for  the 
Anagamin  stage. 

5.  Perfect  means  =  attainment  of  Ana- 

gamin stage. 

6.  Eight  mind  =  Preparation  for  Arhat- 
ship. 

7.  The  grade  of  no-retrogration  =  the 
attainment  of  Arhatship. 

8.  Immortal  youth  =  Pratyeka  Buddha- 
hood. 

9.  Sons  of  the  King  of  the  Law  =  the 
Intermediate  conception  of  Bodhi- 
sattvahood. 

10.  The  summit  of  attainment  =the 
Intermediate  conception  of  Buddha- 
hood. 


THE    WHEEL    OF  LIFE  175 

21-30.  The  ten  characteristics  (literally 
actions).  Each  stage  is  associated  with 
one  of  the  ten  paramitas  (4  vows  plus  6 
paramitas),  viz  : — 1,  joy  ;  2,  mercy  ;  3, 
absence  of  hatred ;  4,  irresistible ;  5, 
absence  of  fanaticism  ;  6,  power  of  mani- 
festation ;  7,  absence  of  self  will  ;  8, 
reverence  ;  9,  the  virtuous  law  ;  10,  the 
absolute  truth. 

31-40.  The  ten  returns,  so  called  because  in 
this  stage  man  returns  to  his  original 
nature  which  is  latent  behind  all  evil : — 
1,  Eeturn  from  the  absolute  world  to  the 
world  of  phenomena  to  save  all  sentient 
being.  2.  Eeturn  to  the  indestructible. 
3.  Eeturn  to  equality  with  all  the  Budd- 
has.  4.  Eeturn  to  omnipresence,  and 
5,  to  inexhaustible  treasures.  6.  Eeturn 
to  the  source  of  absolute  virtue,  and  7, 
to  primal  equality.  8.  Eeturn  to  the 
Buddha  nature,  and  9.  to  deliverance  from 
bondage.  10.  Eeturn  to  the  infinite  es- 
sence of  things. 

41-50.  The  ten  attainments.  These  are  the 
same  as  the  ten  stages  of  Bodhisattva- 
hood,  already  explained  (page  107). 
They     are : — 1,     joy ;      2,     purity  ;      3, 


176    INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

brightness  of  intellect  ;  4,  brightness  of 
wisdom  ;  5,  difficult  to  surpass  ;  6, 
everpresent  manifestations  ;  7,  far  dis- 
tant attainment ;  8,  attainment  of  the 
immovable  state  ;  9,  holy  wisdom  ;  10, 
the   cloud   of    the   Dharma. 

51.  Attainment  of  the  Final  stage  of  Bodhi- 
sattvahood. 

52.  Attainment  of  the  Buddhahood  of 
transcendent  wisdom  with  the  develop- 
ment of  the  three  bodies  (Trikaya). 

D.  Steps  in  the  Perfect  or  En  School  of 
Mahayana.  This  is  the  highest  of  the  four 
schools  and  corresponds  as  we  have  seen  to  the 
doctrine  of  the  Tendai  school  itself.  The  names 
of  the  stages  is  much  the  same  as  in  the  Differ- 
entiated school,  but  the  arrangement  is  slightly 
different,  and  the  Tendai  sect  clainas  that  the  full 
meaning  of  each  stage  is  more  profound,  so  that 
the  two  sets  do  not  correspond  as  closely  as 
would  appear  at  first  sight.  The  usual  classi- 
fication is  as  follows  : — 

(Outer  Division). 

1.  The  stage  of  reason  and  speculation. 

2.  The  stage  of  names  and  letters  or  formal 
learning. 


THE    WHEEL   OF  LIFE  177 

3.  The    stage    of    contemplation.     The    five 

arts. 

(Inner  Division). 

4.  The  stage  of  the  imperfect  conception  of 

truth. 

a.  The  ten  aims. 

5.  The  stage  of  the  partial  comprehension  of 
truth. 

a.  The  ten  grades. 

b.  The  ten  characteristics. 

c.  The  ten  returns. 

d.  The  ten  attainments. 

e.  Universal  enlightenment. 

6.  The  complete  comprehension  of  truth. 
Finally  there  is  the  Sukhavati  school  which 

eliminates  all  the  preceding  stages  and  seeks  to 
attain  Nirvana  by  entering  directly  into  the 
Pure  Land  of  the  Universal  Buddha.  With 
some  this  pure  land  is  taken  literally,  as  a 
material  heaven  to  be  attained  by  faith  in 
Amitabha.  Among  all  philosophic  Buddhists, 
however,  the  Pure  Land  is  a  symbol,  a  state  of 
mind,  an  awakening  of  the  Buddha  seed,  the 
bursting  into  flame  of  the  spark  of  spiritual  life 
to  be  obtained  by  means  of  mystic  adoration  and 
devotional  realization  of  the  true  nature  of 
reality.     This   rebirth   into   Paradise  is   to   be 


178    INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

attained  here  and  now,  at  the  moment  when  the 
Boul  throws  off  the  trammels  of  the  lesser  self, 
and  realizes  its  fundamental  and  ^  priori  union 
with  the  Greater  Self. 

Whether  taken  literally  of  metaphorically,  the 
Sukhavati  Buddhists  divide  the  Pure  Land  into 
two  sections,  Hodo  or  the  True  Land  for  the 
completely  awakened,  and  Kedo,  Apparent  Land, 
for  those  whose  faith  is  tinctured  with  selfish- 
ness and  doubt. 

One  very  important  feature  of  the  Jo  do 
theology  which  has  often  been  overlooked  by 
Western  students  of  the  subject,  is  that  it  teaches 
that  even  after  being  reborn  in  Jodo  a  man  must 
come  back  repeatedly  to  earth  for  the  sake  of 
saving  all  creatures  (This  is  called  the  doctrine 
of  genso  eJco).  Accordingly  there  is  but  little 
real  difference  between  the  salvation  by  works 
school  and  that  by  means  of  the  Pure  Land,  for, 
to  quote  a  booklet  by  S.  Kuroda  :  "  Though 
there  are  the  two  different  passages  of  Shodomon 
and  Jodomon,  mok§a  (emancipation,  here 
equivalent  to  Nirvana)  can  be  obtained  equally 
through  both  .  .  .  Those  who  follow  the 
former  division,  though  they  obtain  Buddhahood 
in  this  world  must  still  accomplish  the  excellent 
deeds  and  vows  of  Bodhisattvas  in  the  Pure 


THE  WHEEL  OF  LIFE  179 

Land  while  the  followers  of  the  latter,  though 
they  be  born  in  the  Pure  Land  must  likewise 
cultivate  and  practise  them,  being  reborn  in  the 
Impure  Land  (This  world)." 


CONCLUSION 

A  SHOET   HISTOEY  OF  BUDDHISM  AND 
THE     PEINCIPAL     BUDDHIST     SECT 

I.     India. 

(a.)     The    Rise    and   Spread   of   Buddhism. 

Most  scholars  have  now  agreed  that  Qakya- 
muni  must  be  assigned  to  the  latter  half  of  the 
sixth  century  B.C.  Then,  as  for  a  long  time 
thereafter,  the  civilization  of  India  was  confined 
to  the  Ganges  basin  and  the  surrounding  country. 
Caste  rules  as  regards  marriage  and  possibly  as 
regards  food  already  set  in,  but  were  not  so  rigid 
and  inviolable  as  in  later  times.  There 
seems  to  have  been  little  over  population,  and 
the  people  must  have  led  an  easy  and  fairly 
comfortable  existence.  The  country  was  broken 
up  into  a  number  of  small  principalities,  each 
ruled  over  by  an  hereditary  prince  or  king, 
though  democratic  states  such  as  that  of  the 
Licchavi's,  who  elected  their  ruler  were  by  no 
means  unknown.  It  is  quite  possible  that 
Prof.  Ehys-Davids  is  right  in  asserting  that 
Quddhodana  was  not  the  king,  but  only  a  chiet 


A    SHORT    HISTORY   OF    BUDDHISM  181 

or  senator  in  a  democratic  ^akya  state.  The 
most  powerful  countries  were  Kogala  and 
Magadha.  The  rulers  of  both  countries  seem  to 
have  been  on  favourable  terms  with  the  Buddha, 
terms,  however,  which  did  not  prevent  them  from 
supporting  other  teachers,  and  seeking  truth  in 
other  religions. 

Then,  as  in  later  times,  it  was  the  custom  to 
support  various  religious  bodies  ;  to  bestow  alma 
upon  mendicant  monks  of  various  creeds,  and 
at  no  time  did  Buddhism  possess  exclusive 
jurisdiction  over  the  religious  mind  of  India.  ^^At 
certain  times  owing  to  especial  patronage  in 
royal  circles,  its  influence  was  predominant,  but 
a  new  ruler  might  shed  his  favour  in  other 
quarters  without  a  serious  hitch  in  the  religious 
world.  The  Brahmins  seem  to  have  gone  on 
with  their  daily  rites  unimpeded. 

Although  the  orthodox  accounts  of  the 
success  of  the  Buddha's  ministry  are  probably 
greatly  exaggerated,  Buddhism  certainly  met 
with  popular  recognition  during  the  life  time  of 
its  founder,  though  it  is  doubtful  if  it  would  have 
become  the  great  religion  of  India  had  it  not  been 
for  the  impetus  given  it  by  A§oka,  the  Buddhist 
Constantine,  who  lived  some  two  centuries  and  a 
half  after  Qakyamuni.      A§oka   was  the  son  of 


182    INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

Bindusara  and  the  grandson  of  Candragupta,  who 
was  the  founder  of  the  famous  Maurya  dynasty, 
and  the  first  Indian  Empire  of  any  importance, 
though,  of  course,  even  this  was  confined  to 
Northern  India.  Candragupta  began  his  reign 
sometime  between  320  B.C.  and  315  B.C.  and 
Agoka  waded  to  his  throne  through  the  blood 
of  his  relatives  about  256  B.C. 

The  early  Mauryas  were  certainly  not  Budd- 
hists, and  probably  favoured  Jainism.  Agoka, 
however,  in  repentance  for  his  former  misdeeds, 
turned  his  mind  to  religion,  and,  though  from  his 
edicts  we  know  that  he  favoured  the  Ajivakas 
and  Nirgranthas  as  well  as  the  Buddhists, 
Buddhism  claimed  his  chief  sympathy,  and  he 
despatched  a  number  of  Buddhist  missionaries 
to  other  kingdoms,  so  that  Buddhism  from  being 
confined  to  Madhyadeca,  and  Pragdega  spread 
to  Mysore,  Kagmira,  Gandhara,  etc.  The  most 
famous  mission  was  that  of  Mahendra,  the  son  or 
nephew  of  Agoka  to  Ceylon,  which  was  quickly 
converted  to  the  faith,  and  has  ever  since  been  a 
stronghold  of  Buddhism,  even  when  it  died  out 
in  its  native  land.  Buddhism  reached  Burma, 
Siam,  etc.,  from  Ceylon,  and  consequently 
remained  faithful  to  Hinayana,  for  though 
during  the  middle  ages  Ceylon  seems  to  have 


A    SHORT    HISTORY    OF    BUDDHISM  183 

dallied  with  Mahayana  for  the  most  part  it 
was  the  headquarters  of  the  more  primitive 
faith,  i.e,  Sthaviravadin  Buddhism. 

Agoka's  descendants  were  weaklings  and  the 
Maurya  dynasty  was  overthrown  by  Pusyamitra, 
a  zealous  Hindu,  and  for  some  generations 
Buddhism  suffered  an  eclipse  in  India,  though 
it  maintained  its  activity  in  Central  Asia, 
Bactria,  Persia,  etc. 

The  next  important  stage  in  Indian  Buddhism 
began  with  Kani§ka,  who  founded  a  Sythian 
dynasty,  and,  being  converted  to  Buddhism, 
re-established  its  prestige  and  importance. 
Kani§ka's  date  has  been  the  subject  of  much 
dispute,  but  probably  he  must  be  referred  to 
the  first  century  A.D.  It  was  in  his  reign 
that  we  first  hear  of  Mahayana  activities, 
though  Kaniska  himself  chiefly  patronized 
the  Sarvastivadins.  Mahayana,  however,  was 
soon  to  become  powerful,  and  owing  to  its 
devotional  aspect,  and  to  the  greater  scope  of 
its  philosophic  activity,  as  well  perhaps  to 
the  fact  that  it  incorporated  many  Hindu  and 
possibly  Persian  ideas,  succeeded  in  greatly 
overshadowing  its  rival,  though  Hinayana  con- 
tinued to  exist  as  long  as  Buddhism  remained 
in  India. 


184    INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

The  next  few  centuries  constituted  the  flower 
of  Indian  Buddhism.  Nagarjuna  was  born 
about  the  end  of  Kaniska's  reign,  and  was 
quickly  followed  by  a  long  line  of  eminent 
speculators,  including  Arya  Deva,  Asanga,  Vasu- 
bandhu,  Dignaga,  Candragomin,  Candrakirti, 
Dharmakirti,  etc.  Soon  after  Nagarjuna's  time 
the  famous  Buddhist  University  of  Nalanda 
was  founded  and  continued  until  the  9th  century 
to  be  the  seat  of  great  learning.  Almost  all 
the  great  dynasties  of  India,  with  one  or  two 
outstanding  exceptions,  either  favoured  Budd- 
hism or  permitted  it  to  grow  unchecked. 

The  decline  of  Buddhism  in  India  dates  from 
the  middle  of  the  eighth  century.  Its  downfall 
was  aided  by  the  attacks  of  the  great  Indian 
philosophers  such  as  Qankara,  but  the  more 
important  reason  was  the  adoption  by  Buddhism 
of  Mantric,  Tantric,  and  Esoteric  forms  and 
beliefs.  Hindu  Tantrism  developed  at  the  same 
time  and  along  similar  lines.  In  many  cases  it 
became  impossible  to  distinguish  between  them. 
Hindu  Tantrism  absorbed  many  Buddhist 
elements,  as  in  fact  did  all  forms  of  Hinduism 
so  much  so  that  modern  Hinduism  might  be 
called  a  combination  of  ancient  Brahmanism 
and    Buddhism.     All    this    tended    to    decrease 


A    SHORT    HISTORY    OF    BUDDHISM  185 

the  independent  power  of  Buddhism,  though 
the  Pala  kings  who  ruled  over  Gauda  and  the 
surrounding  regions  from  A.D.  800-1050  were 
Buddhists,  during  which  time  the  Buddhist 
University  of  Vikramagila  was  a  renowned 
centre  of  Tantric  learning,  replacing  the  ancient 
Nalanda. 

The  Mohammedan  conquests  profoundly  dis- 
turbed all  native  Indian  religions.  Temples 
were  burnt,  monks  and  priests  massacred,  and 
"  heathen  "  practises  put  down.  At  his  time 
Buddhism  did  not  possess  the  recuperative 
power  of  Hinduism,  and  the  torch  of  the  Dharma 
became  extinct  in  its  native  land.  In  Bengal 
alone.  Buddhism  lingered  until  the  sixteenth 
century,  when  it  became  absorbed  by  Hinduism, 
not  without  leaving  strong  traces  of  the  original 
tradition. 

(6.)     Councils    and    Canons. 

The  development  of  the  different  sects  or 
schools  of  Buddhism  was  strongly  affected  by 
the  Buddhist  theory  of  the  great  councils. 
Two  great  councils  are  acknowledged  by  all 
forms  of  Buddhism.  The  first  was  supposed 
to  have  been  held  immediately  after  the 
Buddha's  death,  to  recite  the  scriptures  preached 
by  him,  namely  the  Sutra  and  Vinaya  pitakas, 


186    INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

to  which  some  would  add  the  Abhidharma  pitaka. 
Some  northern  accounts  would  hold  that  there 
were  two  such  councils  held  contemporaneously, 
one  for  the  Sthaviravadins,  and  one  for  the 
Mahasanghikas.  Others  would  say  that  there 
were  three,  adding  one  in  which  the  Mahayana 
siitras  were  recited.  For  the  most  part.  Western 
scholars  have  rejected  the  story  of  the  first 
council  as  a  myth.  Certainly  the  scriptures  in 
their  present  form  cannot  have  been  recited 
then,  but  it  seems  quite  likely  that  an  informal 
meeting  to  discuss  matters  of  policy  took  place. 
This  is  known  as  the  council  of  Eajagriha. 

The  second  council  or  the  council  of  Vai§ali, 
took  place  some  110  years  after  the  death  of 
the  Buddha,  in  order  to  condemn  certain  practises 
on  the  part  of  those  monks  who  had  broken  away 
from  the  ancient  precepts.  The  Sthaviravadins 
claim  that  the  monks  thus  condemned  were  the 
Mahasanghikas,  but  this  seems  improbable. 

Eegarding  the  next  two  councils  the  Buddhist 
records  disagree.  The  Sthaviravadins  or  the 
Theravadins,  maintain  that  a  thii'd  council  took 
place  during  the  reign  of  Agoka.  Of  this  we 
find  no  record  in  orthodox  Northern  accounts, 
and  probably  it  consisted  only  of  a  meeting  of 
the  Theravadin  worthies,  who  were  already  but 


A    SHORT  HISTORY    OF   BUDDHISM  187 

one  among  many  conflicting  sects.  The  Tliera- 
vadins  equally  ignore  the  Northern  account  of  a 
council  supposed  to  have  been  held  in  the  reign 
of  Kani§ka,  which  composed  Sanskrit  com- 
mentaries on  the  three  pitakas,  and  was  probably 
under  the  control  of  the  Sarvastivadins.  There- 
after Buddhism  knows  of  no  great  councils. 
Even  the  Mahayanists  failed  to  convoke  one. 

The  Hinayana  stitra  and  vinaya  pitakas  were 
probably  composed  from  previously  existing 
materials,  shortly  before  the  time  of  A^oka. 
Most  likely  each  sect  made  its  own  redaction 
which  differed  considerably  in  arrangement 
among  themselves,  and  also  as  regards  the 
language  employed.  The  claim  of  the  Pali 
canon  to  be  the  original  and  only  genuine 
version,  is  almost  certainly  false,  though  it  was 
undoubtedly  one  of  the  first  to  be  compiled. 
The  Chinese  translations  of  the  Nikayas  or 
Agamas  seems  to  have  been  from  an  independent 
but  almost  equally  early  source. 

Each  sect  evolved  its  own  commentary,  and 
exposition  of  the  early  writings,  and  these  were 
later  crystallized  into  the  third  or  Abhidharma 
Pitaka.  As  far  as  we  can  judge  from  the  two 
which  have  come  down  to  us,  the  Sthaviravadin 
works   in   Pali,    and   the   Sarvastivadin   works 

N 


188    INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

translated  from  Sanskrit  into  Chinese,  they  were 
entirely  independent  creations,  except  for  the 
misleading  similarity  of  certain  titles.  As  re- 
gards their  age  we  can  only  say  that  the  bulk  of 
the  Pali  or  Sthaviravadin  Abhidharma  works 
must  have  been  in  existence  at  the  time  of  or 
shortly  after  Agoka,  while  the  seven  main  works 
of  the  Sarvastivadin  Abhidharma,  were  com- 
posed some  time  before  the  time  of  Kaniska's 
council. 

Later  and  non-canonical  commentaries  and 
expositions  followed  in  great  profusion  until  we 
have  the  vast  mass  of  Hinayana  literature 
which  meets  our  eyes  to-day. 

The  Mahayana  sutras  are  unquestionably 
much  later  than  the  main  portion  of  the  Hinay- 
ana canon,  and  is  evidenced  by  the  language  and 
style  employed.  Many  of  them,  however,  must 
have  been  composed  at  the  time  of  Kani§ka 
(1st  century  A.D.)  as  they  are  frequently  cited 
by  Nagarjuna  as  authoritative,  though  there 
were  probably  many  later  additions,  inter- 
polations, and  emendations.  The  majority  of 
Mahayana  sutras  probably  reached  their  settled 
form  between  Nagarjuna  (2nd  cent.)  and  Asanga 
(5th  cent.)  The  very  few  Mahayana  works 
dealing  with  the  Vinaya  must  have  been  com- 
posed more  or  less  at  the  same  time. 


A    SHORT    HISTORY    OF    BUDDHISM  189 

Mahayana  has  no  fixed  or  well  defined  canon 
of  Abhidharma  works,  such  as  we  find  with  either 
the  Sthaviravadins  or  Sarvastivadins,  but  the 
various  works  of  the  Mahayana  Patriarchs  were 
accepted  as  the  standard  expositions  of  truth,  and 
as  such  were  incorporated  in  the  Chinese  Canon 
of  the  Mahayana  Abhidharma.  These  works 
sprang  up  in  the  first  century  A.D.  As  far  as 
China  is  concerned  few  were  translated  after  the 
seventh  century  (Hsuan  Chuang  was  the  last  of 
the  great  translators)  and  Dignaga  was  the  last 
author  of  any  importance  to  be  incorporated  in 
the  Chinese  Canon.  Tibet,  on  the  other  hand, 
though  starting  in  the  field  much  later  than 
China  carried  out  the  work  of  translation  for 
some  time  further,  and  for  the  Indian  Buddhist 
works  from  the  seventh  century  down  to  the 
extinction  of  Buddhism  in  India  we  have  only 
the  Tibetan  Tanjur  to  guide  us,  because  with  the 
exception  of  a  few  works  kept  in  Nepal,  almost 
the  whole  of  the  extensive  Buddhist  Sanskrit 
literature  has  perished. 

(c.)     The  Establishment  of  the  Sects. 

All    accounts    agree    that    Buddhism    early 

broke  up  into  a  number  of  different  schools.     In 

Hinayana  alone,  before  the  time  of  Agoka  we  hear 

of  the  eighteen  (or  twenty)  sects  of  Hinayana. 


190    INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

The  study  of  their  differences  is  most  interesting 
and  instructive,  but  unfortunately  we  can 
secure  no  uniform  or  coherent  account  of  them. 
This  is,  no  doubt,  largely  accounted  for  by  the 
fact  that  the  sects  were  not  what  we  mean 
by  the  term,  but  correspond  in  their  early 
stages  to  the  distinctions  between  High, 
Low,  and  Broad  Churches  in  the  Church  cf 
England. 

We  have  only  three  principal  sources  to  guide 
us,  and  none  of  these  agree.  The  first  of  these  is 
the  Southern  account  found  in  the  Pali  work, 
Kattha  Vatthu,  one  of  the  seven  Pali  Abhid- 
harma  works,  a  large  portion  of  which  was 
probably  composed  about  the  time  of  Agoka. 
The  famous  Mahavansa  account  of  the  schools  is 
based  upon  this.  The  second  is  Vasumitra's 
account  of  the  eighteen  sects,  three  translations 
of  which  were  made  into  Chinese,  and  one  into 
Tibetan.  This  may  be  called  the  principal 
Northern  account.  The  third  is  Bhavya's  work 
on  the  subject,  and  exists  only  in  a  Tibetan 
translation.  It  differs  considerably  from  Vasu- 
mitra's on  several  details,  but  is  obviously 
in  accordance  with  the  same  general  tradition 
as  contrasted  with  the  quite  different  KatthS 
Vatthu. 


A    SHORT    HISTORY    OF    BUDDHISM  191 

On  one  point,  however,  all  traditions  agree. 
Hinayana  was  early  divided  into  two  great 
schools,  the  Sthaviravadin,  or  the  school  of  the 
Elders,  and  the  Mahasanghika,  or  the  school  of 
the  Great  Council.  These  two  schools  were 
chiefly  divided  on  questions  touching  Buddhology 
rather  than  on  metaphysical  grounds,  the  former 
regarding  the  Buddha  as  essentially  human,  and 
subject  to  the  fraUties  of  the  flesh,  while  the 
latter  considered  the  Buddha  as  transcendental, 
as  immune  from  human  limitations,  and  even 
approached  the  attitude  of  Christian  Docetism  in 
teaching  that  the  Buddha  never  really  appeared 
on  the  earth,  but  only  created  an  appartional 
form  for  the  salvation  of  the  world.  The 
Mahasanghikas  were  obviously  the  forerunners  of 
Mahayana. 

According  to  Northern  accounts  the  Mahasang- 
hikas were  divided  into  nine  (or  eight)  divisions, 
namely,  (1)  Mula-mahasanghika,  (2)  Ekavy- 
avaharikas,  (3)  Lokottaravadins,  (4)  Kauru- 
kuUaka,  (5)  Bahugrutiya,  (6)  Prajnaptivadins, 
(7)  Caityagailas,  (8)  Avara^ailas,  (9)  Uttara- 
gailas.  Of  these  the  only  one  that  is  definitely 
known  to  us  is  the  Lokottaravadins  whose 
Mahavastu  has  been  so  ably  edited  by  Senart. 
To    what   branch    of    the    Mahasanghikas    the 


192     INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

Chinese  Mahasanghika   Vinaya,    and    the   Sam- 
yukta  Agama  belong,  we  do  not  as  yet  know. 

The  Northern  accounts  further  state  that  the 
Sthaviravadins  were  divided  into  eleven  (or  ten) 
schools,  namely  (1)  Haimavantas,  or  Sthavirav- 
adins proper,  (2)  Sarvastivadins,  (3)  Vatsi- 
putriyas,  (4)  Dharmottaras,  (5)  Bhadrayanikas, 
(6)  Sammitiyas,  (7)  Sannagarikas,  (8)  Mahi- 
gasakas,  (9)  Dharmaguptas,  (10)  Kagyapiyas, 
(11)  Sautrantikas.  Of  these  the  most  important 
were  the  Sthaviravadins  proper,  who  clung  the 
nearest  to  the  psychological  agnosticism  of 
early  Buddhism,  second  the  Sarvastivadins, 
later  known  as  the  Vaiba§ikas  from  their  Vib- 
ha§as  or  great  commentaries,  closely  related 
with  which  were  the  Dharmaguptas,  Kagyapiyas, 
and  Mahigasakas  who  formulated  a  completely 
realistic  philosophy  from  the  analytical  data  of 
earlier  Buddhism  ;  finally  the  Sautrantikas  so 
called  from  their  insistence  upon  the  Sutras 
themselves,  as  opposed  to  the  Abhidharma 
works.  Though  realistically  inclined  the 
Sautrantikas  taught  that  we  have  only  an  in- 
direct (as  opposed  to  direct  of  the  Sarvastivadins) 
perception  of  the  external  universe,  and  in 
certain  cases  seem  to  have  taught  a  pure  con- 
ceptualism,   i.e.   that   aJl   external   objects   are 


A  SHORT    HISTORY    OF    BUDDHISM  193 

merely  conceptions  in  so  far  as  they  appear  to 
have  an  absolute  self -existence.  To  some  branch 
of  the  Sautrantikas  probably  belongs  the  Satya 
Siddhi  ^astra  which  expounds  an  undeveloped 
form  of  the  Qunya  doctrine,  or  the  theory  of  the 
purely  relative  existence  of  all  phenomena. 

Mahayana  Buddhism  probably  arose  from  the 
combination  of  the  Buddhological  ideas  of  the 
Mahasanghikas,  and  the  metaphysical  theories 
of  the  Sautrantikas,  suitably  modified  in  both 
cases.  There  can  be  no  doubt  that  the  first 
systematic  presentation  of  the  Mahayana 
philosophy  was  in  the  Madhyamika  school 
founded  by  Nagarjuna.  Its  doctrine  of  ^tinyata 
and  the  Middle  Principle  including  and  trans- 
cending both  existence  and  non-existence  we 
have  already  examined.  The  Madhyamikaa 
were  soon  divided  into  several  sub-sects,  of  which 
the  most  important  were  the  Svatantrikas,  and 
the  Prasanghas  of  which  the  Prasanghas  were 
destined  to  become  triumphant. 

The  influence  of  the  Madhyamika  sect  was 
enormous.  Many  of  its  doctrines  were  in- 
corporated in  the  Yogacarya  sect,  and  its 
teachings  form  the  basis  of  most  of  Tibetan 
Buddhism,  and  the  Sanron  and  Tendai  sect  of 
China  and  Japan  as  well  as  the   later   schools 


194    INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

founded  thereon.  Even  the  later,  more  complete, 
more  elaborate,  and  more  consistent  Yogacarya 
sect  was  unable  to  supplant  it.  The  later 
Madhyamika  philosophers  waged  war  on  the 
innovations  of  the  Yogacaryas,  claiming  that 
they  were  but  ephemeral  additions  to  relative 
truth,  and  therefore  already  potentially  included 
in  the  absolute  truth  of  their  own  teaching.  For 
this  reason  most  Tibetan  and  Chinese  histories 
of  Buddhism  give  the  Yogacarya  system  as  the 
stepping  stone  from  Hinayana  to  the  perfect 
Mahay  ana    represented    by    the    Madhyamikas. 

As  far  as  China  is  concerned  this  slight  to  the 
Yogacarya  school  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the 
Madhyamikas,  or  their  dependents  had  already 
triumphed  before  the  Yogacarya  doctrines  were 
introduced,  and,  thus  entrenched,  lost  no  oppor- 
tunity of  belittling  any  possible  usurper.  What 
influence  the  Yogacaryas  did  possess  was  chiefly 
through  the  earlier  and  incomplete  translations  of 
certain  individual  works  such  as  the  Mahayana 
^raddhotpada  ^astra,  and  the  DaQabhiimika 
^astra,  etc.,  and  even  the  schools  based  on  these 
works  united  with  the  Madhyamikas  in  con- 
demning the  full  exposition  of  the  Yogacarya 
doctrine  as  contained  in  the  translations  of 
Genjo  (Hsuan  Chuang). 


A     SHORT    HISTORY    OF    BUDDHISM  195 

Notwithstanding  this  fact  the  Yogacarya 
school  must  be  considered  the  full  blossom  of 
Mahayana  philosophy,  the  high  water  mark  of 
metaphysical  Buddhism.  Not  content  with 
accepting  the  vague  ^unya  doctrines  of  the 
Madhyamika  school  it  formulated  a  remarkably 
lucid  and  consistent  doctrine  of  idealism,  ex- 
plaining how  the  universe  was  the  product  of 
mind,  and  yet  at  the  same  time  guarded  itself 
from  the  dangers  of  solipsism.  As  yet  too  little 
is  known  of  the  Yogacarya  metaphysics,  but 
when  translations  are  made  from  their  philo- 
sophical works  we  shall  be  able  to  appreciate,  for 
the  first  time,  to  what  a  high  level  Indian  and 
Buddhist  speculation  had  reached. 

In  its  later  and  more  degenerated  stages  the 
Yogacarya  school  took  up  several  forms  of 
mysticism  and  esotericism.  Its  several  stages  on 
this  path  may  be  marked  off  in  the  following 
way  : — First  came  what  we  may  call  Man- 
trayana,  or  the  doctrine  of  salvation  by  spells, 
exorcisms,  and  incantations.  This  includes  the 
use  of  dharanis  and  mantras.  With  the  theory  of 
the  mystic  value  of  sound,  there  also  arose  the 
idea  of  the  value  of  certain  colours,  and  the 
symbolic  meaning  of  certain  positions  of  the 
hands  (mudra).     With  this  evolved  the  whole 


196    INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

doctrine  of  an  esoteric  as  opposed  to  an  exoteric 
tradition.  The  next  stage,  which  is  usually- 
called  Tantrayana,  is  marked  by  still  further 
symbolism  and  esotericism.  The  Absolute  is 
symbolized  under  various  aspects,  and  in  addi- 
tion to  the  celestial  Buddhas  and  Bodhisattvas  of 
earlier  times,  the  feminine  or  Great  Mother  cult 
was  introduced.  To  each  Buddha  and  Bod- 
hisattva  was  added  a  feminine  counterpart.  In 
certain  cases  Nirvana  was  mystically  pictured  as 
Niratma  Devi.  She  is  to  all  intents  and  purposes 
a  metaphor  for  the  infinite  void.  From  the 
highest  stage  in  the  material  world  the  aspirant 
leaps  into  the  embraces  of  Niratma  Devi  and 
enjoys  something  like  the  pleasures  of  the  senses, 
and  disappears  in  her  as  salt  disappears  in  water. 
The  final  stage  is  marked  by  the  downfall  of  the 
older  systems  and  the  triumph  of  demonology, 
in  which  a  man  seeks  for  success,  and  pleasure 
through  the  worship  of  the  terrible  furies  of 
nature. 


A    SHORT    HISTORY    OF    BUDDHISM  197 

II.     China   and   Japan 

(a).     The  Introduction  of  Buddhism 

Buddhism  reached  China  in  the  first  century 
A.D.  during  the  reign  of  the  Emperor  Ming  Ti. 
We  are  told  that  in  the  year  A.D. 64  the  emperor 
had  a  dream  which  caused  him  to  send  a  com- 
mission to  the  West  to  seek  for  a  new  religion. 
In  67  the  commission  returned  bringing  back 
with  them  two  Buddhist  monks,  Kagyapa 
Matanga  and  Dharmarak§a,  both  of  whom  died 
three  years  later,  not,  however,  without  leaving 
traces  of  their  influence.  One  of  their  trans- 
lations into  Chinese,  the  Sutra  of  the  Forty  Two 
Sections,  which  has  come  down  to  us  presents 
little  metaphysics,  but  expounds  the  ethical 
import  of  Buddhism,  whether  Hlnayana  and 
Mahay  ana,  in  short  pithy  sentences.  It  has 
several  times  been  translated  into  English. 

Buddhism,  however,  was  by  no  means  firmly 
established.  From  time  to  time  further  mission- 
aries and  translators  arrived  in  China,  and  were 
established  in  monasteries,  and  carried  on  their 
work,  but  how  little  influence  it  can  have  obtained 


198    INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

is  seen  by  the  fact  that  it  was  only  in  the  begin- 
ning of  the  4th  century  that  native  Chinese  were 
officially  allowed  to  become  Buddhist  monks. 
From  the  fourth  century  onwards,  however, 
Buddhist  influence  was  constantly  on  the  in- 
crease in  spite  of  occasional  persecution,  until 
the  summit  was  reached  in  the  T'ang  dynasty 
(618-907).  The  Sung  dynasty  (908-1280)  saw 
the  revival  of  Confucian  philosophy,  which, 
however,  in  its  new  form  borrowed  a  very  great 
deal  from  the  doctrines  of  Buddhism,  and 
generally  speaking  from  that  time  on  Confucian- 
ism has  been  the  state  code,  though  Buddhism 
has  always  retained  its  hold  over  the  broad 
masses  of  the  people.  The  favour  shown  by 
the  literati  to  Confucianism  did  not  help  the 
philosophical  or  educational  standard  of  the 
Buddhist  priesthood,  who  were  content  to  pander 
to  the  superstition  of  the  masses.  Of  recent, 
years,  however,  a  great  many  reforms  have  taken 
place.  There  is  a  genuine  revival  of  interest  in 
the  philosophic  side  of  Buddhism  among  th« 
cultured,  and  consequently  the  intellectual 
standard  of  the  monkhood  has  been  considerably 
elevated. 

China  once  converted  to  the  Buddhist  faith 
turned    missionary    herself,    and    most    of   the 


A    SHORT    HISTORY    OF    BUDDHISM  199 

surrounding  countries  received  their  Buddhism 
through  Chinese  influences.  Tibet  first  came 
into  contact  with  Buddhism  in  the  seventh 
century  through  the  marriage  of  the  Tibetan 
King,  Srong  Tsan  Gampo,  with  the  Buddhist 
daughter  of  the  Chinese  Emperor.  Subse- 
quently a  number  of  translations  of  Buddhist 
works  were  made  from  Chinese  into  Tibetan, 
but,  as  was  only  natural,  once  Buddhism  was 
really  established  Tibet  looked  to  India  for  her 
Buddhist  guides,  and  became  permeated  with 
the  Mantrayana  and  Tantrayana  of  later  Indian 
Buddhism  even  more  than  Chinese  Buddhism, 
which  had  received  its  Buddhism  in  the  first 
place  in  the  more  virile  days  of  the  pure  Mad- 
hyamika  and  earlier  Yogacarya  philosophy. 
The  Tibetan  form  of  Buddhism,  known  popu- 
larly as  Lamaism  was  destined  to  triumph  in 
Mongolia,  and  the  Himalayan  States. 

Buddhism  reached  Korea  in  A.D.  372,  and 
quickly  over-ran  the  whole  of  the  peninsula. 
Its  Golden  Age  was  from  the  tenth  to  the  four- 
teenth century.  At  that  time  a  change  in 
dynasty  unseated  the  paramount  position  of 
Buddhism,  and  as  in  China  Buddhism  remained 
the  devotional  home  of  the  peasantry  and  the 
broad  mass  of  the  people,  being  rejected  by  the 


200    INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

aristocracy  as  a  whole.  Since  the  beginning  of 
the  20th  century,  however,  the  revival  spoken 
of  in  China  has  been  even  more  noticeable  in 
Korea.  The  astonishing  reorganization  of 
Korean  Buddhism,  and  its  effect  upon  the 
people  has  been  well  described  by  Starr  in  his 
Buddhism  in  Korea. 

Japan  first  came  into  contact  with  Buddhism 
through  an  embassy  sent  from  Korea  in  the  year 
A.D.  552,  and,  after  a  prolonged  conflict  with 
Shint5,  Buddhism  universally  triumphed,  aided 
largely  by  the  genius  of  the  Prince  Im- 
perial Shotoku  Taishi,  the  Japanese  Agoka  or 
Constantine.  Though  Shinto  never  entirely  died 
out,  from  the  end  of  the  sixth  century  until  the 
beginning  of  the  seventeenth.  Buddhism  was  the 
premier  philosophy  and  religion  of  all  sections  of 
the  nation.  During  the  Tokugawa  Shogunate 
(1608-1867)  the  rehabilitated  Confucianism  of  the 
Sung  period  came  into  favour  in  state  and  edu- 
cated circles,  though  Buddhism  was  never  sup- 
planted. Finally  the  early  stages  of  the  restoration 
government  (from  1867  onwards)  was  marked  by 
an  attempt  to  secure  supremacy  to  Shinto  as 
opposed  to  both  Confucianism  and  Buddhism, 
but  this  movement  was  largely  a  failure.  Con- 
fucianism failed  to  survive,  but  Buddhism  has 


A    SHORT    HISTORY    OF    BUDDHISM  201 

never  been  on  a  stronger  or  more  secure  founda- 
tion, although  it  plays  no  official  part  in  the 
machinery  of  government. 

More  particularly  do  the  Zen  and  the  Shin 
schools  prosper  at  the  present  moment.  In  both 
a  high  standard  of  education  is  required  for 
ordination,  and  the  various  Buddhist  colleges, 
universities,  and  seminaries  scattered  throughout 
Japan,  are  now  the  leading  centres  of  Buddhist 
learning  throughout  the  whole  world.  Here  the 
sacred  works  of  Buddhism,  whether  Pali,  Sans- 
krit, Tibetan  or  Chinese,  are  studied  in  the 
original,  and  all  the  machinery  of  higher  criticism 
evoked  in  their  consideration.  Here  also  not 
only  are  all  the  various  systems  of  Buddhist 
metaphysics  taught,  but  at  the  same  time 
Occidental  science,  philosophy  and  religion  are 
brought  before  the  eyes  of  all  persons  training 
for  the  priesthood. 

In  recent  years  Japan  has  once  more  turned 
missionary.  Japanese  Buddhist  temples  have 
been  established  in  Formosa,  Korea,  Manchuria, 
and  China,  and  have  largely  assisted  in  the 
revival  of  Buddhism  going  on  in  those  countries. 
Similar  institutions  have  also  been  established 
in  Hawaii,  America  and  Canada,  etc.,  chiefly 
for  the  benefit  of  Japanese  living  abroad. 


202    INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

(b).     The  Compilation  oj  the  Canon. 

The  Pali  Canon  is  concerned  with  only  on© 
out  of  many  Hinayana  sects,  and  ignores  th© 
later  developments  of  Buddhist  philosophy  which 
largely  centred  itself  in  Mahayana  schools. 
Sanskrit  literature  on  Buddhism  has  largely 
disappeared,  except  for  a  few  works  in  Nepal,  so 
that  the  Chinese  and  Tibetan  collections  of  th© 
Buddhist  scriptures  remain  our  principal,  and 
in  many  cases  our  only,  means  of  studying  th© 
evolution  of  Buddhism,  and  the  civilization  of 
the  countries  with  which  it  came  into  contact. 
Both  collections  contain  works  of  widely  different 
ages  and  countries,  and  have  at  least  one  or  two 
works  from  practically  all  the  important  sects, 
both  Hinayana  and  Mahayana. 

Of  the  two,  the  Chinese  is  the  better  for  th© 
study  of  the  earlier  phases  of  Buddhism,  th© 
Tibetan  the  later  ;  but  though  the  Tibetan  trans- 
lations are  usually  more  literal,  the  Chines© 
canon  is  much  more  complete  and  comprehensive, 
frequently  giving  two  or  more  translations  of 
the  same  work  at  different  dates,  which  is  in- 
teresting from  the  point  of  view  of  higher 
criticism,  and  finally,  whereas  the  Tibetan  added 
but  little  to  the  philosophic  development  of 
Buddhism,    in   China  and   Japan    many     more 


A    SHORT    HISTORY    OF    BUDDHISM  203 

important  works  were  composed,  and  Buddhist 
philosophy  underwent  considerable  and  very- 
valuable  evolution  in  those  two  countries. 

The  works  contained  in  the  Chinese  canon  are 
of  a  very  varying  character.  It  consists  of 
works  of  very  uneven  merit,  translated  and 
composed  at  widely  separated  periods,  by 
writers  of  very  unequal  ability,  but  of  its  value 
as  a  store-house  of  Buddhist  knowledge,  there 
can  be  no  doubt. 

In  the  early  days  no  attempt  seems  to  have 
been  made  to  fix  a  definite  canon,  but  indivi- 
dual translations  or  original  works  were  accepted 
on  their  merits.  From  time  to  time,  usually 
at  the  Imperial  command,  catalogues  were  made 
of  the  existing  Buddhist  books.  There  are 
thirteen  such  catalogues  which  are  still  extant, 
the  earliest  of  which  dates  back  to  A.D.  520. 
Occasionally  a  collected  edition  of  such  works 
was  printed,  though  it  is  remarkable  that  the  whole 
collection  of  the  Buddhist  Canon  which  became 
larger  and  larger  in  the  course  of  time,  was 
preserved  in  MS.  only,  from  A.D.  67  (the  intro- 
duction of  Buddhism  into  China),  until  A.D.  972. 
Thereafter  such  a  collection  was  frequently 
printed  from  wooden  blocks  specially  carved. 
It  should  be  noted,  however,  that  no  two  such 

o 


204    INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

catalogues  or  editions  agreed  for  the  frequent 
destruction  of  libraries  by  fire  and  civil  war 
in  China  caused  many  books  to  disappear,  whose 
places  were  taken  by  newer  works. 

The  most  famous  and  what  proved  to  be  the 
final  or  definitive  catalogue  of  Buddhist  works 
in  China,  which  unconsciously  became  elevated 
into  a  Canon,  was  the  Ming  catalogue,  so  called 
from  the  fact  that  it  was  compiled  during  the 
Ming  dynasty  (1368-1644).  This  consisted  of 
1662  works,  including  many  duplicate  trans- 
lations and  incidently  contained  the  twelve 
older  catalogues.  Later  catalogues  of  the 
Chinese  Buddhist  scriptures  have  practically  all 
confined  themselves  to  a  rearrangement  of  the 
works  in  the  Ming  list,  and  subsequent  editions 
have  all  been  based  upon  it,  so  that  it  may  be 
justly  called  a  Canon  in  the  strict  sense  of  the 
word,  like  the  Pali  Canon,  though  of  a  strangely 
miscellaneous  character.  In  the  last  generation 
three  new  editions  of  this  Canon  have  been 
printed — one  in  China  and  two  in  Japan.  These 
are  known  respectively  as  the  Nanking,  Tokyo 
and  Kyoto  editions. 

The  present  generation  has  also  seen  the 
formation  of  several  new  and  subsidiary  canons. 
The  most  famous  of  these  is  the  Chinese  Supple- 


A    SHORT    HISTORY    OF    BUDDHISM         205 

mentary  canon  (Zoku-zo-kyo)  which  consists 
of  a  few  translations  from  Sanskrit,  and  a  large 
number  of  original  works  by  Chinese  monks, 
which  for  some  reason  or  other  were  not  included 
in  the  older  Canon.  This  was  compiled  in  Japan 
and  printed  in  Kyoto,  and  is  now  everywhere 
recognised  as  authoritative,  chiefly  no  doubt 
because  most  of  the  works  contained  therein 
were  individually  very  well  known  before. 

AQiong  the  other  canons  thus  formed  and 
printed,  we  find  a  collection  of  canonical  works 
by  various  Japanese  worthies,  irrespective  of 
sects,  and  various  sectarian  canons,  such  as 
the  definitive  editions  of  the  sacred  works  of 
such  sects  as  the  Zen,  Shin,  Jodo,  Nichiren, 
etc.  Finally  a  Japanese  translation  of  the  whole 
of  the  Chinese  Canon  is  now  being  issued  in 
Tokyo. 

(c.)     The  Establishment  of  the  Sects. 

The  establishment  of  sects  in  the  early  days 
of  Chinese  and  Japanese  Buddhism  was 
accomplished  in  a  very  peculiar  manner,  and 
was  largely  based  upon  the  translation  of  certain 
books  or  groups  of  books.  The  early  Chinese 
sects  may  be  arranged  in  the  following  manner : — 

1.  The  Sanron  or  Three  Qastra  Sect,  was  so 
called  because  it  based  itself  upon  the  following 


206    INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

three  Qastras  or  metaphysical  works  : — (a.)  The 
Madhyamika  ^astra  by  Nagarjuna,  (b.)  Qata 
^astra  by  Arya  Deva,  and  (c.)  Dvada^a-nikaya 
Qastra  by  Nagarjuna.  To  these  three  there  is 
sometimes  added  a  fourth,  the  Prajiia  Paramita 
Sutra  Qastra  by  Nagarjuna.  This  sect  dates  back 
to  the  translation  of  the  three  castras  by  Kumara- 
jiva  in  409.  This  school  is  the  Chinese  counter- 
part of  the  Indian  Madhyamika  or  ^unya 
school. 

2.  The  Jojitsu  or  Satyasiddhi  Sect,  so  called 
from  the  Satyasiddhi  Qastra  likewise  translated 
by  Kumarajiva.  There  was  no  sect  corres- 
ponding to  it  in  India,  but  it  was  probably  the 
work  of  some  branch  of  the  Sautrantika  school. 
In  both  China  and  Japan  this  school  has  never 
had  a  separate  existence,  but  was  incorporated 
in  the  Sanron  sect,  as  its  teachings  were  nothing 
more  than  a  Hinayana  variation  of  the  ^unya 
doctrine. 

3.  The  Nehan  or  Nirvana  sect  was  so  called 
from  its  dependence  upon  the  Mahayana  Maha- 
parinirvana  Sutra  (translated  by  Dharmarak^a 
423).  This  sect  had  much  in  common  with  and 
was  later  incorporated  in  the  Tendai  sect.  It 
claimed  to  be  the  last  and  most  perfect  teaching 


A     SHORT    HISTORY    OF    BUDDHISM  207 

of  the  Buddha,  and  emphasized  the  doctrine  of 
the  permanent  reality  or  the  Universal  Buddha 
or  the  Absolute. 

4.  The  J  iron  or  Dagabhiimika  Qastra  Sect 
based  on  Vasubandhu's  work  on  the  ten  stages 
of  the  Bodhisattva's  path  to  Buddhahood.  In 
reality  this  is  one  of  the  works  of  the  Indian 
Yogacarya  school  which  reached  China  in  A.D. 
608  when  Bodhiruci  first  published  his  transla- 
tion. This  sect  was  later  absorbed  by  the 
Kegon  or  Avatamsaka  school. 

6.  The  Jodo  or  Sukhavati  sect,  also  founded 
by  Bodhiruci,  and  including  Donran,  Doshaku, 
and  Zendo  among  its  patriarchs,  taught  the 
doctrine  of  salvation  through  faith  in  Amitabha 
and  rebirth  in  his  Western  Paradise.  By  the 
seventh  century  this  school  was  very  firmly 
established,  and  has  ever  since  exercised  great 
influence  over  Chinese  and  Japanese  Buddhism. 

6.  The  Zen  or  Dhyana  school,  the  school  of 
contemplation,  was  established  in  China  by 
Bodhidharma  who  came  from  India  about  A.D. 
527.  This  school  emphasized  the  value  of 
intuition  as  opposed  to  scriptural  authority,  and 
deprecated  the  acceptance  of  any  doctrine  as 
ultimate  or  final.  This  also  has  come  to  have 
enormous  influence  over  the  Far  Bo&t, 


208    INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

7.  The  Ritsu  or  Vinaya  sect  was  founded  to 
encourage  the  study  of  the  Vinaya  or  Buddhist 
ecclesiastical  discipline  or  Canon  Law.  The 
Chinese  have  accepted  several  versions  of  the 
Vinaya,  but  pay  especial  reverence  to  the 
Dharmagupta  Vinaya  or  the  Vinaya  of  the  Four 
Divisions,  translated  by  Buddhaya?as  about 
A.D.  410.  It  produced  a  number  of  famous 
writers  during  the  T'ang  dynasty  (618-907). 

8.  The  Shoron  or  Mahayana-samparigraha 
^astra  Sect  was  based  on  the  work  of  that  name 
by  Aganga  and  translated  by  Paramartha  io 
A.D.  563.  This  work  was  also  one  of  the  principal 
works  of  the  Yogacarya  sect  of  India,  and  like 
the  Jiron  sect  was  subsequently  absorbed  by  the 
Kegon  sect. 

9.  The  Tendai  sect  which  developed  into  one 
of  the  most  important  of  all  the  schools  was 
founded  in  the  sixth  century,  and  had  for  its 
basic  scripture  the  Saddharma  Pundarika  Sfltra 
or  the  Lotus  of  the  Good  Law.  In  reality  this 
sect  is  the  consummation  of  the  Madhyamika 
tradition,  and  represents  the  stronghold  of  the 
transcendental  philosophy.  After  its  establish- 
ment the  Sanron  sect  which  clung  more  literally 
to  the  teachings  of  the  Madhyamika  sect  sank 


A     SHORT    HISTORY    OF    BUDDHISM         209 

into  disfavour.  The  Tendai  sect  has  added  many 
original  elements  to  Buddhist  philosophy,  and  is 
not  merely  a  presentation  of  Indian  thought. 

10.  The  Eegon  or  Avatamsaka  sect,  so 
called  because  of  the  Buddhavatamsaka  Sutra  or 
Gandha-vyiiha  (translated  in  A.D.  418),  became 
firmly  established  in  the  sixth  and  seventh 
centuries  A.D.  This  sect  plays  the  same  relation 
to  the  Yogacarya  sect  as  Tendai  does  to  the 
Madhyamika.  It  represents  the  immanent 
aspect  of  Chinese  Buddhist  philosophy.  In 
gome  ways  it  marks  the  high  water  mark  of  Far 
Eastern  Buddhism. 

11.  The  HossG  or  Dharma-laksana  sect  came 
into  being  on  the  return  of  Genjo  (Hsuan  Chuang) 
from  India,  when  he  set  about  translating  all  of 
the  important  Yogacarya  works.  This  plays  the 
same  relation  to  the  Yogacarya  school  as  the 
Sanron  sect  does  to  the  Madhyamikas,  and  just  as 
the  Tendai  sect  flourished  at  the  expense  of  the 
Sanron,  so  did  the  Kegon  school  flourish  at  the 
expense  of  the  Hosso  school  in  spite  of  the  great 
prestige  and  influence  of  Genjo  who  left  his  mark 
on  the  teachings  of  the  other  schools. 

12.  The  Bidon  or  Abhidharma  sect  represents 
the  philosophy  of  orthodox  Hinayana,  more 
particularly  of  the  Sarvastivadin  school.    This 


210    INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

Beet  first  arose  on  the  translation  of  the  Abhid- 
harma  Hridaya  ^astra  in  A.D.  391  but  received 
its  chief  impetus  from  Genjo,  who  translated 
the  bulk  of  the  Sarvastivadin  scriptures  in 
addition  to  those  of  the  Yogacarya  school.  The 
most  important  work  was  Vasubandhu's  Abhid- 
harma  Koga  from  which  fact  the  school  is  often 
called  the  Kusha  Sect.  Just  as  the  Jojitsu  sect 
remained  subsidiary  to  the  Sanron  sect,  so  did  the 
Bidon  or  Kusha  sect  remain  subsidiary  to  the 
Hosso  sect. 

13.  The  Shingon  or  Mantra  sect  was  the  last 
importation  from  India,  being  promulgated 
about  A.D.  716.  This  represents  the  Mantrayana 
stage  of  Buddhism  mentioned  above,  when  the 
Yogacarya  school  in  India  had  developed  into 
esotericism,  but  before  Tantrayana  or  sexual 
mysticism  had  made  much  way. 

The  above  thirteen  schools  represent  the 
various  phases  of  Chinese  Buddhism  proper.  In 
later  days  Lamaism  with  its  Tantrayana  gained 
a  certain  hold  in  isolated  parts  of  China  but  never 
secured  general  recognition. 

Apart  from  Lamaism  the  Chinese  Buddhist 
sects  never  possessed  any  elaborate  ecclesiastical 
hierarchy.  They,  like  the  early  Hinayana  sects, 
were  more  like  the  parties  in  the  Church  of 


A    SHORT    HISTORY    OF    BUDDHISM         211 

England  than  independent  organizations.  As 
time  went  on  this  fusion  became  more  marked, 
and  at  the  present  time,  speaking  generally,  all 
Chinese  Buddhist  temples  belong  more  or  less  to 
one  sect,  accepting  for  its  discipline  the  Dhar- 
magupta  Vinaya,  for  its  relative  truth  or  doctrine 
either  the  Tendai  or  Kegon  systems,  and  for  its 
principle  or  absolute  truth  the  doctrine  of  Zen. 
In  addition  all  of  them  preach  the  Sukhavati  or 
Jodo  doctrine  in  some  form  or  other,  usually  as 
a  symbolic  veiling  of  truth. 

The  Japanese  sects  correspond  very  closely  to 
those  of  China,  but  the  chronological  order  is 
somewhat  different.  For  historical  reasons  they 
may  best  be  classified  into  three  groups,  (1)  The 
ancient  or  pre-Heian  sects,  (2)  The  medieval 
sects,  and  (3)  The  modern  sects,  as  each  group 
marked  a  distinct  phase  in  Japanese  history. 

1.  The  Ancient  Sects.  From  A.D.  552  to 
A.D.  800  Japan  was  busily  engaged  in  importing 
Chinese  culture,  in  remodelling  her  institutions  on 
Chinese  lines,  and  in  attempting  to  form  a 
civilization  of  her  own.  In  this  scheme  Buddhism 
played  a  very  important  part,  and  in  Japan  as 
elsewhere  proved  a  veritable  medium  or  harbinger 
of  general  learning,  with  which  it  inculcated  all  its 
believers.     During  the  latter  part  of  this  period 


212    INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

the  capital  of  Japan  was  situate  in  Nara,  in  the 
South,  so  that  the  six  Buddhist  sects  which  were 
imported  at  that  time  are  often  called  the  Nanto 
sects.  In  the  earliest  days  there  seems  to  hay© 
been  no  emphasis  on  any  particular  sect,  as  was  the 
case  in  the  early  days  in  China,  but  in  A.D.  652 
the  Qtlnya  doctrine  in  both  its  Sanron  (Mad- 
hyamika)  and  Jojitsu  (Sautrantika)  forms  were 
introduced  into  Japan.  Shortly  after  Genjo 
(Hsuan  Chuang)  having  returned  to  China  from 
India  and  his  fame  being  noised  abroad,  various 
Japanese  monks  went  to  China  to  study  under 
him,  and  subsequently  brought  back  the  Hosso 
(YogScarya)  and  Kusha  (Sarvastivadin)  doctrines 
to  Japan.  This  took  place  on  four  occasions 
between  A.D.  658  and  716.  In  736  a  Chinese 
monk  brought  over  the  Kegon  or  Avatamsaka 
doctrine  to  Japan.  In  754  another  Chinese  priest 
established  the  Bitsu  or  Vinaya  sect.  As  the 
result  of  all  this  ecclesiastical  activity  the  Buddhist 
priests  amassed  a  great  deal  of  power,  both 
spiritual  and  temporal,  so  much  so  in  fact  that 
the  Emperor  Kammu  decided  to  change  his 
capital  to  Heian  or  Kyoto  lest  his  court  be  too 
much  dominated  by  the  temples  of  Nara. 

2.     The  Medieval  Sects.     At  the  beginning  of 
the    ninth   century    not    only   was    the  capital 


A     SHORT    HISTORY     OF    BUDDHISM  213 

changed,  but  two  young  Japanese  monks  were 
despatched  to  China  to  bring  back  some  other 
forms  of  Buddhism  which  might  supplant  the 
over  powerful  Nara  sects.  As  the  result  of  this 
Dengyo  Daishi  brought  back  the  Tendai  sect, 
and  Kobo  Daishi  the  newly  imported  Shingon 
or  Mantra  sect.  These  two  schools  waxed  very 
powerful,  and  long  retained  the  allegiance  of  the 
Emperor  and  his  court,  though  they  were  of  too 
complex  and  metaphysical  a  nature  to  be  readily 
understood  by  the  people. 

3.  The  Modern  Sects  are  only  comparatively 
speaking  modern  as  the  last  was  founded  in 
A.D.  1253.  These  sects  are  four  in  number,  and 
are  all  simplifications  of  Buddhist  metaphysics. 
In  1174  Honen  Shonin  founded  the  Jodo  or 
Sukhavati  sect,  in  1191  Eisai  establised  the 
Zen  sect  as  an  independent  organization  (It 
had  previously  been  taught  by  the  Japanese 
Tendai  school,  which  was  eclectic).  In  1224 
Shinran  Shonin  founded  the  Shin  sect  or  re- 
formed Buddhism,  which  was  a  still  further 
development  of  the  Sukhavati  doctrine,  and  in 
1253  Nichiren  founded  the  Nichiren  sect,  which 
is  largely  a  popularization  of  the  Tendai  sect. 
The  Zen  sect  had  the  general  adherence  of  the 
Japanese  Samurai  or  military  class,  and  the  Shin 


214    INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

sect  the  adherence  of  the  people  at  large.  The 
Shin  is  famous  for  its  reorganization  of  the 
priesthood  somewhat  along  the  lines  of  the 
Church  of  England,  whereby  the  priests  are 
allowed  to  marry,  to  eat  meat,  etc.  The  Shin 
and  Zen  sects  are  now  by  far  the  most  powerful 
sects  in  Japan.  The  Zen  school  has  probably 
the  most  educated  laity,  and  the  Shin  the  most 
educated  clergy.  Both  of  them  are  at  present 
manifesting  considerable  practical  activity. 

Lamaism  is  divided  between  the  old  or  un- 
reformed  order,  the  JSTingma-pa,  whose  aherents 
wear  red  hats  and  red  clothing,  the  new  or  re- 
formed order,  the  Gelug-pa  which  is  now  the 
more  powerful  and  has  secured  temporal  control 
of  Tibet,  and  whose  adherents  wear  yellow  hats 
and  robes.  There  are  also  several  sub-divisions 
of  each,  and  several  semi-reformed  sects  such  as 
the  Kargyu-pa  and  Sakya-pa  which  range  be- 
tween the  old  and  the  new  orders.  There  is  little 
doctrinal  difference. 


APPENDIX 

THE     SACEED     LITEEATUKE  OF     THE 

BUDDHISTS 

Our  work  would  not  be  complete  without  a 
brief  survey  of  the  principal  types  of  Buddhist 
scriptures.  At  present  Buddhism  may  be  said 
to  be  possessed  of  six  canonical  languages.  These 
are  Pali,  Sanskrit,  Tibetan,  Chinese,  Mongolian, 
and  Manchurian.  The  last  two  may  safely  be 
neglected  as  they  are  but  translations  of  extant 
Chinese  and  Tibetan  works,  but  a  word  or  two 
must  be  said  concerning  each  of  the  others. 
I.     Pali  Literature. 

The  oldest  body  of  Buddhist  literature  is  to 
be  found  in  the  Pali  canon,  which  constitutes  the 
sacred  works  of  the  Sthaviravadins,  or  Thera- 
vadins.  Though  Pali  was  not  the  original 
language  of  Buddhism,  the  other  or  earlier 
redactions  of  the  scriptures  of  primitive  Buddhism 
have  disappeared.  In  common  with  other  forms 
of  Buddhism  there  are  three  great  divisions  of 
the  Canon,  viz  : — 

1.     TJte  Vinaya  Pitalca  or  rules  for  the  dis- 
cipline and  organization  of  the  monkhood. 


216    INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

2.  The  Sutra  (Sutta)  Pitaka  or  the  discourses 
of  the  Buddha,  expounding  the  general 
principles  of  the  Buddhist  religious  and 
philosophical  system. 

3.  The  Ahhidharma  Pitaka,  consisting  of 
various  works  on  the  intricate  points  of 
Buddhist  metaphysics,  or  systematic 
theology. 

The  folloY-ing  details  concerning  each  of  the 
three  Pitakas  may  be  of  interest  : — 

1.  The  Vinaya  Pitaka  comprises  three  books  : 
(a.)  The  Sutta-vibhanga,  a  full  exposition  of  the 
pratimok§a  or  patimokkha,  the  227  rules  for  the 
conduct  of  the  monks,  and  a  somewhat  larger 
number  of  rules  for  the  nuns,  and  of  the  penances 
whereby  transgressions  of  these  rules  may  be 
purged.  The  Sutta  Vibhanga  is  divided  into 
two  books,  the  Bhikkhu-vibhanga  dealing  with 
the  rules  for  the  monks,  and  the  Bhikkhuni- 
vibhanga  dealing  with  the  rules  for  the  nuns, 
(b.)  The  Khandhakas  which  contain  rules  for  the 
organization  of  the  order,  what  clothes  are  to 
be  worn,  how  temples  and  monasteries  are  to  be 
erected,  how  admission  may  be  had  to  the  order, 
etc.  The  Khandhakas  are  likewise  divided  into 
two  books,  the  Mahavagga  or  larger  diAisions, 
and  the  Culla  Vagga  or  smaller  division,     (c.) 


SACRED  LITERATURE  OF  THE   BUDDHISTS     217 

Parivdra  or  appendix,  a  short  manual  of  later 
addition,  probably  composed  in  Ceylon  and  not  in 
India,  and  comprising  a  sort  of  catechism,  or 
examination  paper  on  the  whole  Vinaya,  arranged 
for  purposes   of  instruction. 

2.  The  Sutra  (Sutta)  Pitaka  consists  of  four 
or  five  Nikayas  or  books,  viz  : — (a)  the  Digha- 
nikaya  or  collection  of  longer  discourses  on 
various  points  of  the  Buddhist  faith,  such  as 
rejection  of  caste,  the  four  noble  truths,  etc. 
The  Pali  version  consists  of  34  long  dialogues, 
(b)  The  Majjhima-nikaya  or  collection  of  dis- 
courses or  dialogues  of  medium  length,  containing 
152  dialogues,  (c)  Anguttara-nikaya  or  collec- 
tion of  suttas  or  dialogues  arranged  according  to 
numbers.  This  is  a  favourite  Indian  method  of 
composition.  Things  of  a  single  category  come 
first,  two-fold  categories  second,  and  so  on. 
In  this  way  the  three  marks  (lak§ana)  come  in 
the  third  division,  the  four  noble  truths  in  the 
fourth  division,  the  five  skandhas  in  the  fifth 
division,  etc.  This  nikaya  contains  2,399  short 
Buttas.  (d)  The  Samyutta-nikaya  or  collection 
of  suttas  arranged  according  to  subjects,  or 
systematically  classified.  This  nikaya  contains 
2,889  short  suttas.  In  addition  to  these  four 
principal  nikayas,  the  Southern  accounts  gener- 


218    INTRODUCTION   TO  MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

ally  agree  in  enumerating  a  fifth,  the  Khuddaka- 
nikaya,  or  smaller  nikaya,  a  collection  of  mis- 
cellaneous works,  many  of  which  are  among 
the  most  famous  books  in  the  Buddhist  canon. 
They  are  15  in  number. 

3.  The  Abhidharma  (Abhidhamma)  PitaTca 
consists  of  seven  works,  which  are  systematic 
expositions,  with  enumeration  and  classification 
of  details,  of  the  various  works  of  the  Sutta 
Pitaka.  They  are  especially  concerned  with  the 
psychological  analysis  of  phenomenal  existence. 
These  works  are  : — (a)  The  Dhammasangani 
or  compendium  of  dhamma  or  factors  of  existence, 
(b)  The  Vibhanga  a  continuation  of  the  fore- 
going, (c)  Katha-vatthu  or  discussion  of  the 
points  of  controversy  between  the  eighteen 
early  sects  of  Hinayana  Buddhism  with  the 
defense  of  the  Sthaviravadin  attitude  towards 
each  problem,  (d)  The  Puggala-paniiatti  on  the 
nature  of  the  personality,  (e)  Dhatu-katha,  and 
(f)  Yamaka,  smaller  treatises  on  psychological 
subjects,  and  (g)  Patthana  or  discussion  of  the 
Southern  view  of  causation  and  mutual  relation- 
ship of  phenomena. 

In  addition  to  the  foregoing  canonical  works 
we  have  a  large  number  of  commentaries,  many 
written  by  Buddhaghosa,  and  a  number  of  highly 


SACRED  LITERATURE   OF   THE   BUDDHISTS     219 

respected  independent  works,  such  as  the 
Milinda-panha  or  Questions  of  King  Milinda,  the 
Vissuddhi-Magga  or  Path  of  Purity  by  Buddha- 
ghosa  the  standard  exposition  of  orthodox  Ther- 
avada  philosophy,  and  the  Abhidhammattha- 
sangaha  or  compendium  of  the  meaning  of  the 
Abhidhamma,  a  more  concise  work  on  the  same 
subject,  etc. 

II.  Sanslcrit  Literature. 
1.  Hinaydna  Worlcs. 
The  Pali  works  of  the  Sthaviravadins  have 
been  preserved  to  us  almost  intact.  The  other 
great  school  of  ancient  Hinayana,  the  Sarvas- 
tivadin  sect,  wrote  in,  or  translated  their  works 
into  Sanskrit.  As  a  whole  this  literature  has 
perished,  though  a  certain  amount  has  been 
preserved  to  us  in  Chinese  and  Tibetan  trans- 
lations. Eecent  discoveries  in  Central  Asia  have 
restored  to  us  certain  framents  of  the  original. 
This  sect  has  also  its  Vinaya,  its  Sutra,  and  its 
Abhidharma  Pitakas,  the  first  two  corresponding 
very  closely  to  the  Pali  version,  the  last  con- 
sisting likewise  of  seven  works  but  written 
independently,  and  having  no  connection  with 
the  Pali  Abhidharma,  showing  that  the  whole 
Abhidharma  literature  was  the  creation  of  later 
times,  at  a  period  subsequent  to  the  introduction 

of  sectarian  differences. 

p 


220    INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

The  scriptures  of  the  other  Hinayana  sects 
seem  to  have  perished  completely  save  for  th© 
Mahavastu  which  in  its  original  form  was  prob- 
ably the  introduction  to  the  Lokuttara  version 
of  the  Mahasanghika  Vinaya.  The  Chinese  have 
also  a  translation  of  the  Mahasanghika  Vinaya, 
and  the  Chinese  Samyukta  Agama  (Sanyutta- 
nikaya)  was  also  probably  made  from  a  Mahasan- 
ghika original.  The  little  known  Satyasiddhi 
Qastra,  known  only  in  a  Chinese  translation, 
incorporates  many  of  the  ideas  of  the  Sautranti- 
kas. 

2.     Mahdydna   Works. 

These  must  be  considered  slightly  more  in 
detail : — 

1.  Vinaya.  For  the  most  part  the  Mahay- 
anists  were  content  to  accept,  in  theory  at  least, 
the  Vinaya  works  of  Hinayana,  so  that  little 
contribution  was  made  to  this  branch  of  Budd- 
hist literature  by  the  more  developed  school, 
save  by  certain  works  which  emphasized  the 
Bodhisattva  as  opposed  to  the  Arhat  ideal,  and 
laid  down  certain  additional  rules  in  consequence. 
Even  the  Hinayana  Vinaya  contained  many 
episodes  relating  to  the  biography  of  ^akyamuni, 
many  tales  of  his  former  rebirths  (Jatakas)  and 
many  tales  of  the  retribution  of  merit  and  the 


SACRED  LITERATURE   OF   THE    BUDDHISTS     221 

piimsliment  of  sin  in  the  past  and  present  births 
(avadanas),  etc.  These  portions  were  greatly 
amplified  by  the  Mahayanists,  and  though  these 
amplifications  of  the  Vinaya  were  almost  always 
classed  as  Sutras,  and  not  as  Vinaya  works,  we 
may  say  that  with  Mahayana  Buddha  bio- 
graphies, jatakas,  and  avadanas  took  the  place 
of  the  Vinaya  pitaka  proper  : — 

(a)  Buddha  Biographies.  In  this  section,  in 
addition  to  the  Mahavastu  which  belongs  more 
properly  to  the  Hinayana  school,  we  find  the 
Lalita  Vistara  and  the  Buddha-carita  of 
A§vagho§a.  The  Lalita  Vistara  has  been  trans- 
lated many  times  into  European  languages, 
and  has  become  doubly  famous  through  the  fact 
that  Sir  Edwin  Arnold's  "  Light  of  Asia  "  was 
largely  based  upon  it.  In  its  original  form,  the 
book  belonged  to  the  Sarvastivadins,  but  it  was 
later  remodelled  by  the  Mahayanists  after  which 
it  assumed  an  important  place  in  their  canon. 
The  Buddha  Carita  is  a  magnificent  epic  life 
of  Qakyamuni  by  Agvagho^a,  and  is  interesting 
both  from  the  doctrinal  and  the  literary  point 
of  view. 

(b)  JdtaJca  and  Avaddna  Works.  To  the 
former  belongs  the  Jataka-mala  or  the  Garland 
of  birth  stories,  a  series  of  thirty-four  or   five 


222    INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

previous  lives  of  the  Buddha,  and  to  the  latter 
8uch  well-known  works  as  the  Avadana-gataka 
(The  100  Avadanas),  the  Agokavadana,  etc. 
Many  of  these  have  been  translated  in  whole  or 
in  part  from  Sanskrit  into  English  or  French. 

2.  Sutras.  Amongst  the  vast  mass  of  sutras 
we  may  select  the  Avatamsaka  (or  Gandha- 
vyuha),  the  Saddharma  Pundarika,  and  the 
Sukhavati-vyiiha  as  the  most  important. 

The  Avatamsaka  or  Gandha-vyuha  claims,  as 
we  have  seen,  to  be  the  first  stitra  preached  by 
^akyamuni  after  his  enlightenment.  Part  of  it 
was  delivered  on  earth  and  part  in  the  various 
heavens.  It  is  full  of  mysticism,  and  preaches 
the  doctrine  of  the  Absolute  or  Universal  Buddha, 
the  Trikaya,  or  three  bodies  as  well  as  the  ten 
bodies  of  the  Buddha,  the  Dharmadhatu  or 
eternal  ideal  world  as  opposed  to  the  phenomenal 
world,  and  the  glory  of  the  path  of  the  Bodhi- 
sattvas  and  the  stages  in  that  path. 

The  Saddharma  Pundarika  claims  to  be  one 
of  the  last  sutras  proclaimed  by  the  Buddha  and 
to  contain  the  essence  of  his  doctrine.  It  is 
probably  earlier  than  the  Avatamsaka.  It  is 
less  metaphysical,  and  mystical,  but  even  more 
devotional.  Qakyamuni  is  said  to  be  the 
eternal  father  who  seeks  to  save  his  children 


SACRED  LITERATURE    OF    THE  BUDDHISTS     223 

(all  sentient  being)  who  suffer  in  the  burning 
house  of  the  three  worlds.  In  reality  he  is 
never  born,  and  never  dies,  but  only  appears  to 
do  so  in  order  the  better  to  save  mankind. 

In  the  Sukhavati-vyiiha  (there  are  two,  one 
long,  and  one  short)  the  Universal  Buddha  is 
called  Amitabha,  and  all  men  are  taught  to  seek 
salvation  through  being  reborn  in  his  Western 
paradise. 

Other  highly  important  works  are  the  various 
versions  of  the  Prajna  Paramita  Sutra,  which 
teaches  the  Madhyamika  doctrine  of  ^unya  or 
the  unsubstantiality  of  all  things  ;  the  Surangama 
Sutra ;  and  the  Vimala-Kirti-nirde§a  Siitra  which 
teach  a  later  form  of  the  Madhyamika  doctrine 
verging  on  the  theory  of  the  Absolute ;  and 
the  Lankavatara  Sandhinirmocana  and  Suvarna 
Pravha§a,  which  belong  to  the  Yogacarya 
school  with  its  explicit  idealism. 

3.  Abhidharma.  The  Sanskrit  Mahay  ana 
literature  may  be  divided  into  two  classes, 
(1)  those  works  which  belong  to  the  Madhyamika 
school,  and  (2)  those  which  belong  to  the  Yog- 
acarya school. 

(a.)  The  Madhyamika  works  composed  by 
Nararjuna,    Arya  Deva  or   their  disciples   em- 


224    INTRODUCTION    TO  MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

phasize  the  doctrine  of   ^unya.     To  this  class 
belong  : — 

1.  The    Prajna    Paramita    Sutra    ^astra,    bj 

Nagarjuna. 

2.  The  Dvada^a-nikaya  ^astra,  by  Nagarjuna 

3.  The  Madhyamika  Qastra,  by  Nagarjuna. 

4.  The  ^ata  ^astra,  by  Arya  Deva. 

5.  The  Bodhicaryavatara,  by  Qanti  Deva. 
(b.)     The   Yogacarya   works   are   chiefly   the 

writings  of  Asanga  and  Vasubandhu,  two  brothers. 
The  Bodhisattva  Maitreya  is  also  frequently 
mentioned  as  the  founder  of  the  school.  The 
nature  of  his  personality  remains  in  doubt.  He 
is  supposed  to  be  the  future  Buddha  residing  in 
the  Tu§ita  heaven,  who  came  down  to  India  to 
proclaim  the  true  doctrine,  as  in  the  Yoga- 
caryabhumi  Qastra.  Some  suppose  him  to  be 
a  fictions  person  evoked  by  Asanga  to  suit  his 
own  purpose  ;  others  suppose  him  to  be  an 
historical  person,  later  identified  with  the 
mythical  Bodhisattva.  Asanga  must  be  con- 
sidered the  chief  Patriarch  of  the  school.  His 
younger  brother  Vasubandhu  was  first  an 
adherent  of  the  Sarvastivadin  school,  during 
which  time  he  composed  the  famous  Abhidharma 
Ko§a,  and  was  later  converted  by  Asanga  to 
Mahayana,  and  subsequently  composed  many 
metaphysical  works  on  the  later  doctrine. 


SACRED  LITERATURE  OF  THE  BUDDHISTS    225 

The  most  important  works  of  this  class  are  : — 

1.  The  Yogacarya-bhiimi  Qastra  by  Maitreya. 

2.  The  Prakaranaryavaca  Qastra  by  Asanga. 

3.  Sutralankara-tika  by  Asanga. 

4.  Mahayana-samparigraha  Qastra  by  Asanga 

5.  Da§abhumika   ^astra  by  Vasubandhu. 

6.  Alambana-pratyaya-dhyana     ^astra     by 
Jina. 

7.  Vidyamatra-siddhi  ^astra  by  Vasubandhu. 

8.  Mahayana-abhidharma-sangiti-Qastra    by 
Asanga. 

At  a  slightly  subsequent  period  arose  a  long 
line  of  Buddhist  logicians,  beginning  with 
Dignaga,  and  including  Dharmakirti.  These 
works  have  been  lost  in  the  original  Sanskrit, 
but  the  Chinese  canon  contains  two  such  works, 
and  the  Tibetan  a  much  larger  quantity. 

III.     Tibetan  Literature. 

The  Tibetan  version  of  the  Buddhist  literature 
is  divided  into  two  classes. — 

1.  The  Kanjur  consisting  of  the  Vinaya  and 
Sutras  (100  or  108  volumes  in  all),  and 

2.  The  Tanjur  consisting  of  various  Abhid- 
harma  works,  commentaries  and  doctrinal  ex- 
positions, etc.,  (225  volumes  in  all). 


226    INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

1.     The  Kanjur — 

The  Kanjur  consists  of  the  following  seven 
great  divisions  : — 

1.  Vinaya,  consisting  of  a  translation  of 
one  variation  of  the  Sarvastivadin  Vinaya. 
(13  vols.) 

2.  Prajnd-Pdramitd,  the  sutras  preaching  the 

Qiinya  doctrines  or  the  theory  of  un- 
substantiality.     (21    vols.) 

3.  Avatamsaka,   consisting   of    the    Buddha- 

vatamsaka  Sutra  or  Gandha-vytiha,  the 
mystico-metaphysical  siitra  supposedly 
first  delivered  by  the  Buddha.     (6  vols.) 

4.  RatnaJmta,  a  collection  of  various  Buddho- 
logical  sutras,  including  the  Sukhavati- 
vytiha.     (6  vols.) 

5.  Sutra,  all  sutras  not  otherwise  classified, 
and  including  the  Saddharma  Pundarika, 
Lankavatara  Sutras,  etc.,  and  various 
Hinayana  sutras.     (30.  vols) 

6.  Nirvana,    consisting    of    the    Maha-pari- 

nirvana  Siitra  (Mahayana  version)  con- 
taining an  account  of  the  last  acts  and 
teachings  of  the  Buddha.     (2  vols.) 

7.  T antra,  containing  the  works  of  the  later 
esoteric  doctrine  in  the  earlier  (Mantra) 
and  later  (Tantra)  phases.     (22  vols.) 


SACRED   LITERATURE  OF   THE   BUDDHISTS     227 

2.     The  Tanjur, 

This  is  divided  as  follows  : — 

1.  Tantra,  various  works  dealing  with  the 
esoteric  doctrines,  chiefly  from  an  ex- 
pository point  of  view. 

2.  Sutra,  various  works  dealing  with  the 
exoteric  doctrines,  including  translations 
of  the  works  of  Nagarjuna,  Arya  Deva, 
Maitreya,  Asanga,  etc. 

One  separate  volume  contains  hymns  of 
praises  of  several  Buddhas  and  Bodhisattvas, 
and  another  volume  fulfils  the  functions  of  an 
index.  Incidentally  it  may  be  remarked  that 
while  the  Kanjur  is  more  or  less  known  to  us, 
much  spade  work  remains  to  be  done  before  it 
can  be  said  that  we  have  mastered  the  contents 
of  the  Tanjur,  which  from  many  points  of  view 
is  the  more  interesting  of  the  two,  as  well  as 
containing  much  information  which  is  otherwise 
inaccessible. 

IV.     The  Chinese  Canon. 

The  most  complete  and  comprehensive  collec- 
tions of  Buddhist  books  is  to  be  found  in  the 
Chinese  Canon,  which  preserves  in  translation 
many  works  of  the  various  schools  which  would 
otherwise  be  lost.  Including  duplicate  trans- 
lations of  the  same  work,  which   are  many,  it 


228    INTRODUCTION    TO   MAHAY  AN  A    BUDDHISM 

contains   1662  separate  works,    which  may    b© 
arranged  in  the  following  way  : —  ** 

I.     Indian  WorTcs. 
(books    written    in    India    and    translated    into 
Chinese). 

1.  The  Sutra  Pitaka. 

A.  Mahaydna  Sutras.  These  are  divided  into 
five  classes,  corresponding  to  the  Mahayana 
theory  of  the  periods  of  the  Buddha's  life.  These 
classes  are: — (1).  Avatamsaka  class;  (2). 
Vaipnlya  class  ;  (3).  Prajna  Paramita  class  ; 
(4).  Saddharma  Pundarika  class  ;  (5).  Maha- 
parinirvana  class.  The  last  two  are  frequently 
counted  together. 

B.  Hinayana  Sutras,  These  consist  of  the 
works  supposed  to  have  been  preached  by  the 
Buddha  during  his  second  or  Hinayana  period. 
These  are  divided  into  two  classes  : — (1).  Agama 
class  consisting  of  translations  of  the  four 
Agamas  corresponding  to  the  four  Nikayas  of 
the  Pali  canon,  together  with  translations  of 
many  separate  stitras  contained  therein  ;  (2) 
Sutras  teaching  Hinayana  doctrines  but  not 
classed  under  the  agamas. 

2.  The  Vinaya  Pitaka. 

A.  Mahayana  Vinaya.  consisting  of  the 
Mahayana  Brahmajala  siitra,  and  other  similar 

**  The  arrangement  here  given  is  that  of  the  Tokyo  edition. 


SACRED  LITERATURE   OF   THE   BUDDHISTS     229 

works,  giving  the  Mahayana  or  Bodhisattva 
Pratimok§a,  or  precepts  for  those  striving  after 
Buddhahood,  in  place  of  the  Hinayana  Prati- 
mok§a,  or  precepts  for  those  striving  after 
Arhatship. 

B.  Hinayana  Vinaya.  Consisting  of  various 
versions  of  the  Hinayana  disciplinary  rules. 
The  most  important  schools  represented  are 
(l)  The  Dharmagupta,  (2)  Mula-sarvastivadin, 
(3)  Sarvastivadin,  (4)  Mahi§asaka,  (5)  Kagy- 
apija,  (6)  Mahasanghika,  etc. 

3.     The  Abhidharma  Pitalca. 

A.  MaTidymia  AbhidJiarma.  These  may  be 
divided  into  (1)  Works  dealing  with  Mahayana  in 
general  irrespective  of  sects,  (2)  Works  belonging 
to  the  Madhyamika  school,  (3)  Works  belonging 
to  the  Yogacarya  school. 

B.  Hinayana  Abhidharma.  These  may  be 
divided  into  (1)  Works  dealing  with  Hinayana  in 
general  irrespective  of  sects,  (2)  Works  belonging 
to  the  Sarvastivadin  sect,  (3)  Works  of  other 
sects,  such  as  the  Satyasiddhi  ^astra  of  the 
Sautrantikas,  etc. 

4.     The  Kalpa  Pitalca. 
A.     Mantras  and  Dhardnls.     These  represent 
the  early  stages  of  Mahayana  esotericism,  with 
their  various  magical  formulae,  and  invocation 
©f  celestial  Buddhas  and  Bodhisattvas,  etc. 


230    INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

B.     Tantras  and  Later  Esoteric  Works.     Thes« 

consist  of  the  few  works  of  the  later  Tantrayana 

of  India   which   were   translated  into   Chinese, 

in  which  mysticism  and  occultism  were  curiouslj 

mixed.     The  whole  of  the  Kalpa,    or    Mystery 

Eitual,  Pitaka  belongs  exclusively  to  Mahayana. 

II.     CHINESE    WORKS. 

(Original    works   composed   in   China.) 

1.      Commentaries. 

A.  Commentaries  on  the  Sutra  PitaJca,  divided 
into  Mahayana  and  Hinayana  works,  though  som© 
of  the  commentaries  on  Hinayana  works  were 
composed  by  Mahayanists. 

B.  Commentaries  on  the  Vinaya  Pitaka^  like- 
wise divided  into  Mahayana  and  Hinayana 
works,  though  the  Hinayana  Vinaya  was  for  the 
most  part  accepted  by  all  Mahayanists. 

C.  Commentaries  on  the  Abhidharma  Pitaka, 
Mahayana  and  Hinayana,  giving  the  Chinese 
interpretation  of  Indian  Buddhist  philosophy, 
though  presenting  many  original  ideas. 

2.     Sectarian    Works. 
These  consist  of  expositions  of  the  systems  of 
the  various  schools  of   Chinese  Buddhism,    and 
are  divided  into  works  on  : — 

A.  The  Kegon  or  Avatamsaka  school. 

B.  The  Tendai  school. 


SACRED   LITERATURE  OF   THE   BUDDHISTS     231 

C.  The  Shingon  or  Mantra  school. 

D.  The  Eitsu  or  Vinaya  school. 

E.  The  Jodo  or  Sukhavati  school. 

F.  The  Zen  or  Dhyana  school. 

3.     Miscellaneous    WorTcs. 
These  consist  of  various  types  of  works,  which 
may  be  divided  into  : — 

A.  Eituals  and  Confessions. 

B.  Histories  and  Biographies. 

C.  Anthologies  and  Compilations. 

D.  Dictionaries  and  Catalogues,  etc. 

V.     The     Chinese     Supplementary     Canon. 

Using  the  Chinese  Canon  as  a  base  there 
gradually  arose  a  vast  mass  of  literature  of  a 
commentarial,  critical,  and  expository  nature, 
which  came  to  be  considered  the  standard  inter- 
pretations of  Chinese  Buddhist  philosophy. 
These  together  with  a  few  miscellaneous  trans- 
lations from  Sanskrit,  which  had  not  been 
included  in  the  former  collection,  were  grouped 
together  to  form  the  Chinese  Supplementary 
Canon.  Their  arrangement  corresponds  very 
closely  to  that  of  the  original  canon,  and  is  as 
follows  : — 

I.     Indian  Worlcs. 
A.     Translations  from  the  Sutra  Pitaka  of  the 
six  classes. 


232    INTRODUCTION   TO   MAHAYANA    BUDDHISM 

B.  Translations    from    the    Vinaya    Pitaka 
especially  the  Miila-Sarvastivadin. 

C.  Translations  from  the  Abhidharma  Pitaka, 
Hinayana,  and  Mahayana. 

D.  Translations  from  the  Kalpa  Pitaka,  or 
esoteric  works. 

II.     Chinese  Works. 
1.     Commentaries. 

A.  Commentaries   on   the   Sutra   Pitaka   (1) 
Hinayana  and  (2)  Mahayana. 

B.  Commentaries  on  the  Vinaya  Pitaka  (1) 
Hinayana  and  (2)  Mahayana. 

C.  Commentaries  on  the  Abhidharma  Pitaka 
(1)  Hinayana  and  (2)  Mahayana. 

2.     Sectarian  Works. 
Works   expounding   the   principles   of  : — 

A.  The  Sanron  or  Madhyamika  school. 

B.  The  Hosso  or  Yogacarya  school. 

C.  The  Tendai  school. 

D.  The  Kegon  or  Avatamsaka  school. 

E.  The  Shingon  or  Mantra  school. 

F.  The  Zen  or  Dhyana  school. 

G.  The  Jodo  or  Sukhavati  school. 

3.     Miscellaneous  Works. 

A.  Histories  and  Biographies. 

B.  Compilations  and  Anthologies. 


SACRED  LITERATURE  OF  THE    BUDDHISTS     233 

Finally  we  may  add  that  many  Japanese  sages 
wrote  commentaries  which  have  come  to  be 
eonsidered  standard  expositions  of  the  doctrines 
«f  their  own  sects. 


FINAL     NOTE 

1.  Technical  terms.  For  the  most  part, 
wherever  practical  technical  terms  have  been 
reduced  to  their  Sanskrit  form.  Through  lack 
of  type,  no  distinction  has  been  made  between 
cerebral  and  dental  t.,  etc.,  or  between  the 
various  classes  of  nasals.  Where  no  Sanskrit 
form  exists  the  Japanese  pronunciation  of  the 
Chinese  ideographs  has  been  employed. 

2.  Authorities.  Owing  to  the  popular  nature 
of  the  present  work,  I  have  felt  it  unnecessary 
to  cite  authorities,  which  are  dealt  with  at 
length  in  my  larger  work,  now  in  preparation. 
This  omission  is  largely  due  to  the  fact  that  the 
authorities  are,  for  the  most  part,  in  languages 
not  accessible  to  the  general  student. 


CHELTENHAM   PRESS  LTD. 
SWINDON  RD.,  CHELTENHAM 


Date  Due 


i 


K=S,29|4,^0244 


"sm,  wi 


BL  1451  . M3  1922 

McGovern,  William 
Montgomery,  1897- 

An  introduction  to  Mahayana 
Buddhism 


in, 


Ml